About This Manual. Psion GM3WCF2011BE, 7535 Hand-Held Computer

I

NTRODUCTION

1.1 About This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

1.2 Text Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

1.3 About The 7535 Hand-Held Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

1.3.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

1.3.2 The 7535 Hand-Held Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

1.3.3 The 7535 Hand-Held Safety Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 1

Chapter 1: Introduction

About This Manual

1.1 About This Manual

This manual describes how to configure, operate and maintain the Psion Teklogix

7535 hand-held computer.

Chapter 1: Introduction provides a basic overview of the 7535 hand-held.

Chapter 2: Unpacking & Basic Checkout describes the steps required to get the 7535 ready for operation.

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 7535 describes the 7535 features and outlines how to charge and maintain the battery.

This chapter also provides a description of the keyboard, how to navigate in

Microsoft® Windows® CE, how to use the internal scanner, and so on.

Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE describes the Microsoft® Windows® CE desktop and how to use it. This chapter also outlines the basics of moving around a Windows CE window, selecting and opening icons, files, folders and working with a Windows dialogue box.

Chapter 5: Configuration provides a description of the Windows CE Control Panel and how to use it to configure the 7535, along with the scanners attached to the hand-held, and so on.

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application describes TESS and ANSI operations. This chapter also provides descriptions of the Tekterm parameters.

Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories describes the peripherals and accessories available for your 7535 hand-held.

Chapter 8: Specifications details radio, hand-held computer and battery specifications.

Appendix A: Support Services And Worldwide Offices provides the helpdesk phone number at the Mississauga, Ontario, Canada office and details the support services available. This appendix also lists the worldwide office addresses and phone numbers.

Appendix B: Port Pinouts And Cable Diagrams includes pinouts and diagrams of the ports and cables.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 3

Chapter 1: Introduction

Text Conventions

1.2 Text Conventions

Note: Notes highlight additional helpful information.

Important: These statements provide particularly important instructions or additional information that is critical to the operation of the equipment.

Warning: These statements provide critical information that may prevent physical injury, equipment damage or data loss.

4 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 1: Introduction

About The 7535 Hand-Held Computer

1.3 About The 7535 Hand-Held Computer

The 7535 is a ruggedized hand-held personal computer, running the Microsoft®

Windows® CE.net operating system. It is intended for use in commercial and light industrial applications with a focus on real time wireless data transactions. All possible bar code input methodologies are supported by one of the variety of scanners available. Optimization for specific operational environments is supported with a wide range of peripheral options and carrying accessories.

1.3.1 Features

• Rugged design:

sealed from water and dust to IP54 (light rain) rating.

withstands multiple drops of up to 6.5 feet onto concrete.

• Large 240 x 320 portrait mode display that is available in colour or black and white with or without a touchscreen

• Automatic backlighting for both the display and the keypad.

automatic backlight and contrast control.

daylight readable screen.

• Processor and memory:

Intel PXA255 400Mhz CPU with 32 MB FLASH and 64 MB RAM standard.

• Microsoft® Windows® CE.net operating system

• Application software:

Internet Explorer 5.5 for CE.

Tekterm terminal emulation.

• Ergonomic keyboard designed to accommodate left- and right-handed use.

• Two keyboard formats available:

58-key with 6 function keys (standard).

36-key large button with 10 function keys.

keypads feature EL backlight for visibility in low-light conditions.

• Wireless communication:

Compact FLASH slot normally equipped with an IEEE 802.11b

11 Mbps 2.4GHz Wi-Fi radio.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 5

Chapter 1: Introduction

Features

standard antenna integrated onto radio card.

optional high performance internal antenna available.

Bluetooth SD I/O radio.

• Expansion slot:

SD I/O slot that supports extra FLASH memory (up to 512 MB) or a

Bluetooth radio.

• Programming environment:

HTML

.net Compact framework

Java, Visual C++

• Bar code applications:

internal 1D and 2D scan engines.

internal CMOS image capture scan engine.

supports decoded and undecoded tethered scanners.

• RFID applications:

internal dual laser scanner/RFID engine.

external tethered RFID reader.

6 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

1.3.2 The 7535 Hand-Held Computer

Chapter 1: Introduction

The 7535 Hand-Held Computer

Figure 1.1 7535 With 58-Key Keyboard

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 7

Chapter 1: Introduction

The 7535 Hand-Held Computer

Figure 1.2 7535 Docking Port

Figure 1.3 Tether Port

Figure 1.4 Scanner Window

8 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

1.3.3 The 7535 Hand-Held Safety Labels

Chapter 1: Introduction

The 7535 Hand-Held Safety Labels

Figure 1.5 Laser Warning Labels

Figure 1.6 Radio Labels

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 9

Chapter 1: Introduction

The 7535 Hand-Held Safety Labels

Figure 1.7 Manufacturer’s Label

Warning: Using controls or adjustments or performing procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

10 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

U

NPACKING

& B

ASIC

C

HECKOUT

2.1 Preparing The 7535 For Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

2.1.1 Equipment You Need To Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

2.1.2 Charging The Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

2.1.3 Attaching Carrying Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

2.1.3.1 Attaching The Hand Strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

2.1.3.2 Attaching The Pistol Grip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

2.2 Powering Up The 7535 And Configuring The Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

2.2.1 Installing The Battery And Switching The 7535 On . . . . . . . . . 17

2.2.2 Configuring An IEEE 802.11 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

2.3 Advanced NETWLAN Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

2.3.1 Preferred Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

2.3.2 Advanced Network Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

2.3.3 Configuring WEP Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

2.5 Checking The Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

2.6 Uploading New Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

2.8 Resetting The 7535 Hand-Held . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

2.7 Calibrating The Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 11

Chapter 2: Unpacking & Basic Checkout

Preparing The 7535 For Operation

2.1 Preparing The 7535 For Operation

Typically, 7535 hand-helds are configured at the factory and arrive ready for use.

Although the 7535 is equipped with an internal Compact Flash and SD I/O slot, these slots are not intended for user modification. If a device needs to be changed or added in these slots, contact qualified Psion Teklogix personnel. Refer to

Appendix A: Support Services And Worldwide Offices for the service number closest to you.

2.1.1 Equipment You Need To Get Started

You’ll need:

• A 7535 compatible battery charger, docking station or portable docking module (PDM) with power supply.

• An operating wireless network (if you are not operating the equipment in batch mode).

• A medium Phillips head screwdriver.

2.1.2 Charging The Battery

Important: The 7535 uses a high capacity Lithium-Ion battery. It is critical that you review the battery safety guidelines in “Lithium-Ion

Battery Safety Precautions” on page 208 before charging the battery.

Batteries shipped from the factory are not charged. They must be fully charged prior to use. Full capacity may not be reached until at least 5 full charge/discharge cycles have been performed.

7535 batteries can be charged using a gang charger or the 7535 internal charger.

When using the internal charger, a suitable power source is required. All chargers and docking stations are described in Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories beginning on page 210.

2.1.3 Attaching Carrying Accessories

Psion Teklogix recommends that a carrying accessory – a hand strap, pistol grip or shoulder strap – be installed on the 7535 before use.

If your hand-held is not fitted with a hand strap or pistol grip, you can install either using the carrying accessory kit supplied. You’ll need:

• A Phillips head screwdriver.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 13

Chapter 2: Unpacking & Basic Checkout

Attaching The Hand Strap

Important: Do not use adhesives such as Loctite to secure the screws on the carrying accessories. These chemicals may damage the plastic casing.

2.1.3.1

Attaching The Hand Strap

Note: A Phillips head screwdriver is required.

Psion Teklogix recommends that the hand strap provided with your 7535 always be used. However, if your unit has an internal scanner and you plan to use the pistol grip accessory, a hand strap is not required.

Two Phillips head screws are provided with the hand strap.

• Attach the strap to the two threaded inserts located at the back of the 7535 near the top of the unit.

Figure 2.1 Attaching The Hand Strap

14 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 2: Unpacking & Basic Checkout

Attaching The Pistol Grip

• Stretch the handstrap toward the base of the 7535, and hook the bottom of the handstrap into the slot near the base of the battery pack.

Figure 2.2 Hooking The Hand Strap To The 7535

2.1.3.2

Attaching The Pistol Grip

Note: A Phillips head screwdriver is required.

The pistol grip is attached to the back of the 7535 using the four threaded inserts in the upper part of the 7535 casing. Four black #4-40 Phillips head screws are provided with this accessory.

Note: Prior to installation, make sure the trigger mechanism is securely snapped into the pistol grip body and that the trigger operates properly.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 15

Chapter 2: Unpacking & Basic Checkout

Powering Up The 7535 And Configuring The Radio

• Position the pistol grip so that it fits snugly over the back of the unit and the inserts on the back of the 7535 align with the holes in the pistol grip.

Figure 2.3 Attaching The Pistol Grip

• Using a Phillips screwdriver, securely fasten the pistol grip to the back of the 7535.

2.2 Powering Up The 7535 And Configuring The Radio

Note: Psion Teklogix offers a Portable Docking Module (PDM) along with its power supply to help speed the checkout and confirmation process for your 7535. The PDM can power your hand-held with or without a battery installed in the 7535. Refer to Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories beginning on page 205 for more information about this accessory.

16 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 2: Unpacking & Basic Checkout

Installing The Battery And Switching The 7535 On

2.2.1 Installing The Battery And Switching The 7535 On

If you are not using a docking station or PDM:

• Slide the charged battery with the moulded plastic facing you into the 7535.

Click the battery into place.

Figure 2.4 Installing The Battery

Note: If you are using a docking station, you can insert an uncharged battery, dock the unit and switch it on.

If you are using a PDM, you can configure your unit without a battery, with a charged battery or with an uncharged battery.

If you are using a hand strap:

• Hook the bottom of the hand strap into the slot at the base of the battery.

To switch the 7535 on:

• Press and hold down the <ENTER/ON> or the <SCAN> key for at least one second.

• When all four LEDs flash orange, release the <ENTER/ON> button.

A splash screen displaying the Psion Teklogix logo and the Microsoft®

Windows® CE. net logo appears. When Windows® CE has successfully loaded, the startup desktop is displayed.

Note: The screen may go blank for a few seconds after the splash screen loading bar reaches the end. This is part of the normal Windows CE cold boot process. The desktop is displayed after a few moments.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 17

Chapter 2: Unpacking & Basic Checkout

Configuring An IEEE 802.11 Radio

2.2.2 Configuring An IEEE 802.11 Radio

The most common 802.11b settings are configured as defaults. However, there are some fields that must be completed, including the ESSID of your access point and the security methods implemented in the network (including access keys). At various stages during network setup, you can tap on the taskbar radio icon to view detailed statistics such as the access point you are connected to, the radio strength, and so on.

Important: If the 7535 is equipped with a radio and it has never been configured, the radio settings dialogue box opens automatically when the unit is powered on. Follow the directions beginning at Step 4 on page 19 to configure the radio.

After the initial configuration, you must follow the directions beginning at Step 1 below to open the Control Panel and display the radio settings dialogue box.

To configure the 802.11b radio:

1. Open the

Control Panel

. If you have a touchscreen, tap on the

Control Panel

icon on the desktop. If you’re using a keyboard, press <BLUE> <0> and choose

Control Panel

from the

System Menu

.

2. Open the

Network and Dial-up Connections

applet.

Figure 2.5 Network And Dial-Up Connections

18 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 2: Unpacking & Basic Checkout

Configuring An IEEE 802.11 Radio

3. Choose the

NETWLAN1

icon to open the

802.11b Wireless LAN Settings

window.

4.

Figure 2.6 802.11b Wireless LAN Settings Window

IP Address

In the

IP Address

tab,

‘Obtain an IP address via DHCP’

is selected by default.

This is the most common configuration. If you prefer, choose

‘Specify an

IP address’,

and enter a static IP address.

Figure 2.7 IP Address Assignment

Note: If you enter a static IP Address, press <TAB> to switch between the address entry fields. Use the <LEFT> and <RIGHT> arrow keys to position the cursor in an IP address field. (If you do not have a static

IP Address allocated to you, contact your System Administrator.)

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 19

Chapter 2: Unpacking & Basic Checkout

Configuring An IEEE 802.11 Radio

5.

Wireless Networks

First, make certain that the check box next to

‘Use Windows to configure network setting’

is enabled (

√

) so that the items you configure in this window are activated. If this option is not enabled, press <TAB> to highlight the check box, and press <SPACE> to enable it.

List of networks broadcasting ESSID

Preferred networks

6.

Figure 2.8 Radio Settings

ESSID (Extended Service Set Identifier)

Press the <TAB> key again to highlight the

‘Available networks...’

list, and choose an access point that is broadcasting its ESSID. Since access

points are generally secure, they will most likely not be listed here; you’ll need to define the access point to which your 7535 will connect.

Press the <TAB> key until the <Add...> button is highlighted. Press

<ENTER> to open the

Wireless Network Properties

dialogue box.

Type the appropriate ESSID (Extended Service Set Identifier) in the

Network name

text entry field at the top of this dialogue box.

Type your access point’s

ESSID here.

Figure 2.9 Wireless Network Properties

20 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 2: Unpacking & Basic Checkout

Configuring An IEEE 802.11 Radio

The

Network name

field can contain a maximum of 32 characters. The name assigned here is listed in the preferred network list labelled

‘Automatically connect to these networks:’

(see Figure 2.8 on page 20).

Note: Keep in mind that the 7535 will only communicate with access points that are configured with the same ESSID.

7.

Ad Hoc And Infrastructure

If you are using an “Infrastructure” network – one in which 7535s must pass data through an access point – leave the checkbox next to

‘This is an ad hoc network’

blank.

If you are using an “Ad Hoc” network – a network in which 7535s pass data

directly to other 7535s without an access point – press the <TAB> key to highlight

‘This is an ad hoc network’,

and press the <SPACE> key to enable (

√

) the Ad Hoc check box.

8.

Saving The Configurations

In the

Wireless Network Properties

dialogue box, press the <TAB> key until the <OK> button is highlighted. Press <ENTER> to save the configurations.

9. Once the

NETWLAN Settings

dialogue box (Figure 2.8 on page 20) is displayed, you need to save all your radio configurations. Press <TAB> to highlight the

Wireless Networks

tab, and press <ENTER> to save the configuration.

10.

Reviewing The Configurations

To determine if the radio configuration has been successfully saved, in the

Network and Dial-up Connections

window (see Figure 2.6 on page 19), choose the

NETWLAN1

icon to redisplay the

802.11b Wireless LAN Settings

window. Review the contents under each tab in the window to make certain that your settings have been saved. To be sure that the unit is communicating with an access point, check that the radio strength meter in the taskbar is active.

To determine if you have successfully connected to the access point network and have received an IP Address from the DHCP server, open the

NETWLAN1

status window from the

System Tray

in the taskbar.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 21

Chapter 2: Unpacking & Basic Checkout

Advanced NETWLAN Settings

Press <BLUE><0> and choose

System Tray

from the

System Menu

. Use the

<LEFT> and <RIGHT> arrow keys to highlight the radio strength meter and then, press <ENTER>. The

NETWLAN1

statistics window is displayed.

Check that the “

Network Name

” field displays the one you specified.

Choose the <More...> button with the <RIGHT> or <LEFT> arrow key to launch the

NETWLAN1

status window. Choose the

IP Information

tab to determine the unit IP Address. If you prefer, you can determine the unit IP Address from the MS DOS command prompt located in the Windows folder in the

Explorer application. Type “ipconfig” in the command line to display your

IP Address.

2.3 Advanced NETWLAN Settings

This section describes a few additional options in the

NETWLAN Settings

dialogue box.

Keep in mind that these options are not necessary for radio configuration. All the steps necessary for your radio to communicate with your network are detailed in

“Configuring An IEEE 802.11 Radio” beginning on page 18.

Preferred Networks

Figure 2.10 Radio Settings

Move up &

Move down Buttons

Advanced

Button

22 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 2: Unpacking & Basic Checkout

Preferred Networks

2.3.1 Preferred Networks

Each network that you configure is listed in the preferred networks list under

‘Automatically connect to these networks’

. These are the preferred networks that the 7535 attempts to connect with in sequence, beginning at the top of the list. If you need to rearrange this list of networks – move networks up and down in the list:

• Press the <TAB> key to highlight the preferred networks list.

• Use the <UP> or <DOWN> arrow keys to highlight the network in the preferred list that you want to move up or down.

• To move the highlighted item in the list upward or downward, press <TAB> to highlight the <Move up> or <Move down> button.

• Press <ENTER> to move the item up or down in the preferred network list.

2.3.2 Advanced Network Access

If you have configured more than one network, the <Advance> button in the

NETWLAN

Settings

dialogue box (Figure 2.10 on page 22) is used to specify the type of network your 7535 can access.

To access the

Advance

dialogue box:

1. Press the <TAB> key to highlight the <Advance> button, and press

<ENTER>.

Figure 2.11 Advanced Network Settings

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 23

Chapter 2: Unpacking & Basic Checkout

Configuring WEP Keys

These options specify the type of network connection your 7535 will choose from the preferred network list labelled

‘Automatically connect to these networks:’

(see Figure 2.10 on page 22).

‘Any available network (AP preferred)’

– connect to an infrastructure network or an ad hoc network listed in the preferred network list.

‘Access point (infrastructure) only’

– connect to an infrastructure network listed in the preferred network list.

‘Computer-to-computer (ad hoc) only’

– connect to an ad hoc (peer-to-peer) network listed in the preferred network list.

‘Automatically connect to non-preferred networks’

– connect to an infrastructure network not listed in the preferred network connection list.

2. When you’ve made your selections, press <TAB> to highlight the

<Close> button, and press <ENTER>.

2.3.3 Configuring WEP Keys

To set up WEP (Wired-Equivalent Privacy) encryption to prevent others from accidentally accessing your network, follow the steps in this section.

1. Open the

Control Panel

.

2. Open the

Network and Dial-up Connections

applet.

Figure 2.12 Network And Dial-Up Connections

24 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 2: Unpacking & Basic Checkout

Configuring WEP Keys

3. Choose the

NETWLAN1

icon to open the

802.11b Wireless LAN Settings

window.

Figure 2.13 802.11b Wireless LAN Settings Window

Figure 2.14 Radio Settings

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 25

Chapter 2: Unpacking & Basic Checkout

Configuring WEP Keys

4. Display the options under the

Wireless Network

tab. If it’s not displayed, use the <TAB> key to highlight the left-most tab in the

NETWLAN Settings

dialogue box –

IP Address

. Press the <RIGHT> arrow key to display the options under the

Wireless Network

tab.

Preferred Networks

Figure 2.15 Wireless Networks Tab

5. Press the <TAB> key to highlight the <Add..> button, and press

<ENTER> to display the

Wireless Network Properties

dialogue box.

√

Modify WEP Ke

Figure 2.16 Wireless Network Properties

26 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 2: Unpacking & Basic Checkout

Configuring WEP Keys

Important: To add or modify a WEP Key in an EXISTING network:

• In the ‘preferred network’ list (see Figure 2.15 on page 26), highlight the network in which you want to add or modify a

WEP key, and then

• RATHER THAN SELECTING THE <Add...> BUTTON, select the <Properties> button.

6. Press <TAB> until

‘Data encryption (WEP enabled)’

<SPACE> key to enable (

√

) this option.

is highlighted. Press the

7. To define your own WEP keys, press the <TAB> key to highlight

‘The key is provided automatically’

. Press <SPACE> to deselect the checkbox.

8. Press the <TAB> key to highlight the <Modify WEP Keys...> button, and press <ENTER>.

Figure 2.17 WEP Key Settings

9. Press the <TAB> key to move from field to field in this dialogue box.

Network key:

Used to specify a 5 or 13 ASCII character sequence or an equivalent 10 or 26 Hexadecimal digit sequence that matches the active WEP key on the access point.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 27

Chapter 2: Unpacking & Basic Checkout

Additional Radio Security Options

Key format:

Defines the format WEP keys used – either ASCII alphanumeric characters or Hexadecimal digits. For example, if the access point has an active key of bobby , the 7535

Key format

would be set to ‘ASCII characters’ and the

Network key

would be defined as bobby .

Key length:

Defines the length of the keys as either

104 bits/13 characters

or

40 bits/5 characters

. (Intel radios support both these lengths. Other radios may be restricted.)

Key Index (advanced):

Identifies the WEP key. Up to 4 keys can be indexed.

Keep in mind that

Key Index

numbering for Windows CE starts at 0 (zero), so if an access point and a hand-held have been assigned a Transmit Key of 1 ,

Windows CE will match that with

Key Index

0 (zero). If an access point and a hand-held have been assigned a Transmit Key of 4 , Windows CE will match that with

Key Index

3 , and so on.

10. Press <TAB> to highlight the <OK> button, and press <ENTER>.

2.4 Additional Radio Security Options

Additional security options can be set through the

Wireless Network Properties

dialogue box.

Figure 2.18 Network Authentication, EAP and 802.1X

Network Authentication (Shared Mode)

If

‘Network Authentication’

is enabled (

√

), the access point sends a known unencrypted challenge packet to the 7535 radio which encrypts the packet and sends it back to the access point. The access point attempts to decrypt the

28 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 2: Unpacking & Basic Checkout

Checking The Scanner encrypted packet and forwards an authentication response packet back to the 7535 radio, indicating the success or failure of the decryption. If the packet is successfully encrypted/decrypted, the user is authenticated.

If this option is disabled (the default setting), network authentication is not used.

EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) and Enable 802.1x

“802.1x” is the IEEE standard that offers additional security for local area networks. It provides authentication for user devices attached to an Ethernet network, whether wired or wireless. A packet encapsulated in an “EAP” is used in conjunction with the “802.1x” standard to authenticate users at the

MAC layer.

Available EAPs are listed in the dropdown menu next to the

‘EAP’

option.

To enable “802.1x”, press <TAB> to highlight

<SPACE> key to enable (

√

) it.

‘Enable 802.1x’

, and press the

2.5 Checking The Scanner

If your 7535 is equipped with an internal scanner, it will successfully decode most

1D bar codes as delivered. Press the SCAN button and check for a valid decode on any UPC bar code. If desired, set the “Dot Time” parameter to zero in the ‘Teklogix

Scanners’ applet in the

Control Panel

to turn off the default aiming dot.

Performance is improved if you disable all unneeded bar codes under the ‘Bar

Codes’ dialogue screen. Review “Scanner Properties” on page 86 for details about bar codes.

2.6 Uploading New Applications

The simplest way to upload Windows CE.net applications into the 7535 is to use a

PDM with a USB equipped PC. Refer to “Portable Docking Module (PDM)” on page 219 for more details about the PDM.

• Attach the supplied USB cable between the host port on your PC and the

PDM ‘device’ port.

• Install the PDM on the 7535 and turn it on.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 29

Once WinCE is booted, the PC should indicate it has found a new USB storage device. (You will need the Windows 2000 operating system or later).

[Final details TBD]

To upload an application:

• Drag the file onto the USB device folder.

• Shut down the USB device on the PC before disconnecting the 7535.

• Perform a cold reboot of the 7535 – hold down the <ENTER> and

<BLUE> keys for at least a second.

2.7 Calibrating The Touchscreen

If your 7535 is equipped with a touchscreen, it will need to be calibrated. Refer to

“Calibrating The Touchscreen” on page 44 for details.

2.8 Resetting The 7535 Hand-Held

Note: You do not need to reset your 7535 after configuring the radio.

To reset the 7535:

• Press and hold down the <BLUE> key and the <ENTER/ON> key simultaneously for a minimum of six seconds.

A reset results in a complete reboot of the unit. All RAM memory contents are lost.

The contents of the flash memory and memory card are preserved.When the 7535 is reset, the screen displays the Psion Teklogix and Microsoft® Windows® CE.net splash screen before displaying the startup desktop.

G

ETTING

T

O

K

NOW

Y

OUR

7535

3.1 Features Of The 7535 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

3.2 The Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

3.2.1 Battery Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

3.2.2 Removing And Installing The Battery Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

3.2.3 Charging The Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

3.3 Switching The 7535 Hand-Held On And Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

3.4 The Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

3.4.1 Modifier Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

3.4.1.1 Activating Modifier Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

3.4.1.2 Locking Modifier Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

3.4.2 The Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

3.4.3 The 58-Key Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

3.4.4 The 36-Key Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

3.4.5 The Keypad Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

3.5 The Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

3.5.1 Adjusting The Display Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

3.5.2 Adjusting The Contrast On Monochrome Displays . . . . . . . . . 43

3.5.3 Calibrating The Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

3.6 7535 Hand-Held Computer Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

3.6.1 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

3.6.1.1 Charge LEDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

3.6.1.2 Radio Traffic LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

3.6.1.3 Scan LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

3.6.2 Onscreen Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

3.6.3 Audio Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

3.6.3.1 Adjusting The Beeper Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

3.7 Internal Scanners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

3.7.1 Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

3.7.2 Scanning Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

3.7.3 Scan LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

3.7.4 Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

3.7.5 Operating One Dimensional (1D) Internal Laser Scanners. . . . . . 53

3.7.6 Operating Internal PDF Laser Scanners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

3.7.7 Operating Internal Two Dimensional (2D) Imager Scanners. . . . . 53

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 31

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 7535

3.8 Connecting & Disconnecting Tethered Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

3.9 Monitoring The Battery And Maximizing Run Time . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

3.10 Monitoring The Network Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

3.11 Uploading Data In A Docking Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

3.12 General Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

3.12.1 Caring For The Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

3.12.2 Cleaning The 7535 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

32 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

3.1 Features Of The 7535

7535 Screen

Ambient Light Sensor

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 7535

Features Of The 7535

Docking Port

Figure 3.1 Front Of 7535

Tether Port

Stylus

(Pointing Tool)

Scanner Window

Battery Pack

Tether Port

Figure 3.2 Back Of 7535

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 33

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 7535

The Battery

3.2 The Battery

The 7535 hand-held operates with a Lithium-Ion battery pack. Preparing the hand-held unit for operation requires that a battery pack be charged and installed in the unit.

3.2.1 Battery Safety

Important: Before attempting to install, use or charge the battery pack, it is critical that you review and follow the important safety guidelines in the section entitled “Lithium-Ion Battery Safety Precautions” beginning on page 208.

3.2.2 Removing And Installing The Battery Pack

Note: TURN OFF THE 7535 HAND-HELD BEFORE REMOVING THE

BATTERY PACK. If you do not turn the hand-held off before removing the battery, it may be necessary to reboot the unit. Any active sessions will be lost.

Removing The Battery Pack

• If your 7535 is equipped with a hand strap, unhook it from the base of the battery.

• Press down the release tab at the top of the battery, and slide the battery out.

34 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 7535

Charging The Battery

Installing The Battery Pack

To install the battery pack:

• Slide the battery pack with the moulded plastic facing you into the 7535.

Click the battery into place.

Figure 3.3 Installing The Battery Pack

• If your computer is equipped with a hand strap, insert the hook at the end of the hand strap into the slot at the base of the battery.

3.2.3 Charging The Battery

Important: FOR DETAILED INFORMATION about 7535 chargers and

docking stations, refer to Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories beginning on page 205.

All batteries must be charged before use. The 7535 battery can be charged with a variety of chargers. These include:

• 6-Gang Charger (Model #HU3006) – charges up to six Lithium-Ion batteries at one time.

• Portable Docking Module (PN 1030085) – charges the 7535 battery (with the battery installed in the unit).

• Combo Charger (Model #HU3002) – a desktop charger that charges the

7535 internal battery along with a spare battery pack.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 35

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 7535

Switching The 7535 Hand-Held On And Off

• Combo Docking Station (Model #HU4002) – operates as both a charger and a docking station. Operating as a charger, both the battery installed in the computer and a spare battery can be charged simultaneously. When used as a docking station, it provides connectivity (10/100 BaseT Ethernet interface) to a host Ethernet network, primarily for batch data file transfers.

• Quad Docking Station (Model #HU4004) – can charge the battery of up to four 7535s inserted in the docking station while transferring data through an

Ethernet connection.

• Powered Cradle – can charge the 7535 with the battery installed in the hand-held.

It can take from 1.5 to 4 hours to charge a battery. The 7535’s intelligent charging system protects the battery from over-charging by terminating the charge process when the battery is at maximum capacity.

Note: Refer to “Monitoring The Battery And Maximizing Run Time” on page 55 for additional information about the 7535 battery.

Important: To avoid damaging the battery, chargers will not begin the charge process until the battery temperature is between 0˚C (32˚F) and

39˚C (102˚F). If the battery is too hot or cold, the battery status

LED flashes yellow and the charge is suspended. Refer to

Table 3.1, “Charge LEDs” on page 46 for details.

3.3 Switching The 7535 Hand-Held On And Off

Switching On The 7535

• Press and hold down the <ENTER/ON> key for at least one second.

• When all four LEDs flash orange, release the <ENTER/ON> button.

A splash screen displaying the Psion Teklogix logo and the Microsoft®

Windows® CE. net logo appears followed by the startup desktop.

Note: If the 7535 is in suspend state, pressing any key ‘wakes’ the unit from this state. The screen in which you were working before the computer entered suspend state is displayed.

36 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 7535

The Keyboard

Switching Off The 7535

Important: Keep in mind that turning off the 7535 does not result in a complete reboot; rather, the unit enters a power-saving,

“suspend” state. When the 7535 is turned on from suspend state, operation resumes within a few seconds.

To switch off the 7535:

• Press the <BLUE> key, and then press the <ENTER/ON> key.

Important: If the word ‘BLUE’ is displayed in uppercase in the taskbar area at the bottom of the screen, this key is locked “on” – the 7535 will not switch off. Press the <BLUE> key again to unlock it; then press <BLUE> <ENTER/ON> to switch the 7535 off.

3.4 The Keyboard

The 7535 offers two types of keyboard layouts – a 58-key keyboard and a 36-key, large button keyboard. Most of the keys on these keyboards operate much like a desktop computer. Where a key or key function is not consistent with the PC keyboard, the differences are noted.

The <BLUE> and <ORANGE> modifier keys provide access to additional keys and system functions. These functions are colour coded in orange and blue print above the keyboard keys.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 37

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 7535

Modifier Keys

F11 F12

F1 F2

F13 F14

F3 F4

CTRL

1

!

GHI

4

$

PQRS

&

7

SPACE

.

F15

'

+

F5

F19

F9

ABC

2

@

JKL

5

%

TUV

*

8

MENU

)

0

F16 -

F6

M3 M5

M1

SHIFT

F17

F7

M4 M6

M2

3

DEF

#

MNO

6

^

WXYZ

(

9

TAB

E

S

C

E

N

T

E

R

O

N

O

F

F

DEL

BKSP

ALT

F18

F8

F20

F10

Figure 3.4 58-Key And 36-Key Keyboard Layouts

3.4.1 Modifier Keys

The <SHIFT>, <CTRL>, <ALT>, <BLUE> and <ORANGE> keys are modifier keys. Pressing a modifier key changes the function of the next key pressed. For example, on a 58-key keyboard, a square bracket is printed in orange print above the

<4> key. Pressing the <ORANGE> key followed by the <4> key displays a square bracket rather than the number 4.

The <SHIFT>, <CTRL> and <ALT> keys operate much like a desktop keyboard except that they are not chorded (two keys held down simultaneously). The modifier key must be pressed first followed by the key whose function you want modified.

38 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 7535

Activating Modifier Keys

3.4.1.1

Activating Modifier Keys

When a modifier key is pressed once, it is displayed in lowercase letters in the taskbar at the bottom of the 7535 screen. For example, if the <CTRL> key is pressed, ctrl key is displayed at the bottom of the unit screen. Once the next key is pressed, the modifier key becomes inactive and disappears from the taskbar.

3.4.1.2

Locking Modifier Keys

When a modifier key is pressed twice, it is ‘locked’ on. A ‘locked’ modifier key is displayed in uppercase letters in the taskbar. For example, pressing the <BLUE> key twice locks it on – it is displayed as BLUE KEY in the taskbar at the bottom of the computer screen.

The locked modifier key will remain active until it is pressed a third time to unlock or turn it off. Once a modifier key is unlocked (pressed a third time), the uppercase representation at the bottom of the screen is no longer displayed.

3.4.2 The Keys

The <SHIFT> Key

The <SHIFT> key is used to display uppercase alpha characters. A ‘locked’

<SHIFT> key (pressed twice) operates like the <CAPS LOCK> key on a desktop keyboard.

The Arrow Keys

The Arrow keys move the cursor around the screen in the direction of the arrow – up, down, left and right. The cursor is the flashing box or underline character that indicates where the next character you type will appear.

The <BKSP/DEL> Key

The <BKSP> key (sometimes referred to as destructive backspace) moves the cursor one character to the left, erasing the incorrectly entered key stroke.

The <DEL> key (<BLUE> <BKSP>) erases the character at the cursor position.

The <CTRL> And <ALT> Key

The <CTRL> and <ALT> keys modify the function of the next key pressed and are application dependent.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 39

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 7535

The 58-Key Keyboard

The <TAB> Key

Typically, the <TAB> key moves the cursor to the next field to the right or downward.

The <ESC> Key

Generally, this key is used as a keyboard shortcut to close the current menu, dialogue box or activity and return to the previous one.

The <SPACE> Key

Pressing this key inserts a blank space between characters. In a Windows dialogue box, pressing the <SPACE> key enables (

√

) or disables a checkbox.

The <SCAN> Key

Pressing the <SCAN> key – the yellow key with the star-burst scan symbol on it – activates the scanner beam while pressed. For units that do not have internal scanners, this key is either inoperable or can be remapped to another key function

(such as an <ENTER> key).

3.4.3 The 58-Key Keyboard

In addition to alphanumeric keys that are directly accessible on the keyboard (no key combination is required) and the keys described in this chapter, the 58-key keyboard also provides function keys and macro keys. These keys are not used as part of the

Windows CE operating system. They can be custom defined for each application.

The Tekterm application utilizes these keys. Refer to “Additional Keyboard

Functions” on page 113 for details about Tekterm keys.

3.4.4 The 36-Key Keyboard

On 36-key 7535s, all alpha characters are printed on the unit plastic in orange typeface above the numeric keys. To access an alpha character, you must first press the <ORANGE> key and then press the numeric key above which the alpha character you want to type is printed.

Because the alpha keys on a 36-key keyboard are laid out much like the letters on a telephone – generally in groups of three letters per numeric key – you need to take a few extra steps to access the alphabetic characters. The examples in this section help illustrate how to access alpha characters.

40 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 7535

The 36-Key Keyboard

Choosing A Single Alpha Character

The examples below illustrate how to access A, B and C, all of which are printed in

orange characters above the numeric key, <2>.

To choose the letter ‘a’:

• Press the <ORANGE> key, and press the numeric key <2>.

To choose the letter ‘b’:

• Press the <ORANGE> key twice to lock it ‘on’, and press <2> twice.

• Press the <ORANGE> key again to unlock or turn it off.

To choose the letter ‘c’:

• Press the <ORANGE> key twice to lock it ‘on’.

• Press <2> three times, and then

• Press the <ORANGE> key again to unlock or turn it off.

Creating Uppercase Letters

To display a capital letter:

• Press the <ORANGE> key and then the <SHIFT> key before typing the alpha character.

Choosing More Than One Alpha Character From The Same Key

If you need to choose more than one alpha character from a single key, you’ll need to press the ‘Accept’ key between alpha selections. The ‘Accept’ key is presented as an arrow

⇒ symbol above the ‘0’ (zero) key. Pressing this key signals the 7535 to display the alpha character you’ve chosen and await the next selection from the same key.

For example, suppose you want to type the letters ‘a’, ‘b’ and ‘c’. These letters are all accessible from the numeric key, <2>.

To type the letter ‘a’:

• Press the <ORANGE> key twice to lock it ‘on’, and then press the numeric key, <2>.

• Press the ‘Accept’ key <

⇒

> to indicate that the letter ‘a’ should be accepted and that another letter from the same key will be chosen.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 41

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 7535

The Keypad Backlight

To type the letter ‘b’:

• Press the <2> key twice.

• Press <

⇒

> to accept the letter ‘b’.

To type the letter ‘c’:

• Press the <2> key three.

When you have completed your alpha selections from this key, you can do one of the following:

• If you want to choose additional alpha characters from another key(s), leave the <ORANGE> key ‘on’, and press the next numeric key that supports the alpha character you require.

• If you do not want to choose any additional alpha characters, press

<ORANGE> again to unlock or turn ‘off’ the key and end alpha selection.

Choosing Multiple Alpha Characters From A Range Of Keys

If you plan on choosing alpha characters from a number of different keys, you are

not required to press the ‘Accept’ <

⇒

> key after each alpha selection. The <

⇒

> key is only required when you are choosing more than one alpha character from the

same key – e.g., ‘a’, ‘b’ and ‘c’ from the <2> key.

Suppose you want to type the letters ‘a’, ‘d’ and ‘g’. These alpha characters are accessed from the numeric keys <2>, <3> and <4>.

• With the <ORANGE> key locked ‘on’ (press twice), press <2> to type the letter ‘a’.

• Press <3> to type ‘d’, and press <4> to type the letter ‘g’.

• To end alpha selection, press the <ORANGE> key a third time to unlock it.

3.4.5 The Keypad Backlight

The intensity of the keypad backlight and the conditions under which this backlight is activated can be configured using the Keyboard icon in the Windows CE Control Panel .

The behaviour of the keypad backlight is tailored in the Keyboard Properties dialogue box.

Refer to “Keyboard Backlight” on page 81 for details about this option.

Note: Keep in mind that this option may be restricted to supervisory use only.

42 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 7535

The Display

3.5 The Display

7535s are equipped with display backlighting to improve character visibility in low light conditions. The unit switches on when a key is pressed and the ambient light is below the set threshold. A light sensor on the front of the hand-held determines the ambient light level. On some displays, the contrast can also be adjusted to further improve character visibility.

3.5.1 Adjusting The Display Backlight

The behaviour of the display backlight – the ambient light threshold below which the backlight will become active and the intensity of the backlight – can be specified in the Display Properties dialogue box in the Windows CE Control Panel .

Note: Refer to “Display Backlight” on page 77 for details about the Display

Properties dialogue box.

3.5.2 Adjusting The Contrast On Monochrome Displays

Note: In addition to the manual adjustments described in this section, the display contrast can also be adjusted using the Windows CE Control Panel.

Refer to “Display Contrast” on page 77 for details about this dialogue box.

On monochrome displays only, the display contrast can be adjusted from the unit keyboard using the <BLUE> key and function keys <F1> and <F2>.

To darken the display:

• Press the <BLUE> key, and then press <F1> . Repeat this key combination until the contrast suits your needs. To work more efficiently with these keys, refer to the note below.

To lighten the display:

• Press the <BLUE> key, and then press <F2> . Repeat this key combination until the contrast suits your needs. To work more efficiently with these keys, refer to the note below.

Note: To adjust the display contrast quickly, lock the <BLUE> key “on” by pressing it twice. You can then press the <F1> and <F2> function keys until you can easily read the contents of the screen.

When you have satisfactorily adjusted the contrast, press the <BLUE> key a third time to unlock or turn it off.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 43

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 7535

Calibrating The Touchscreen

3.5.3 Calibrating The Touchscreen

If your 7535 touchscreen has never been calibrated or if you find that the stylus pointer is not accurate when you tap on an item, use the Stylus Properties dialogue box in the Windows CE Control Panel to recalibrate the screen.

• In the Control Panel , choose the Stylus icon to display the Stylus Properties window.

Figure 3.5 Stylus Icon

• Select the Calibration tab, and then choose the ‘ Recalibrate ’ button.

Figure 3.6 Calibration Screen

• Follow the directions on the calibration screen to calibrate the screen.

44 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 7535

7535 Hand-Held Computer Indicators

3.6 7535 Hand-Held Computer Indicators

7535s use LEDs (Light Emitting Diode), onscreen messages and audio tones as indicators.

3.6.1 LEDs

The 7535 is equipped with four tri-coloured LEDs. This section outlines what these

LEDs indicate.

Important: If an LED is illuminated in red, the operator should be cautious as this generally indicates an abnormal operating condition or active laser emission.

Radio Traffic

LED

Scanner

LED

User

Application

LED

Charge

LED

Figure 3.7 Keyboard LEDs

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 45

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 7535

Charge LEDs

3.6.1.1

Charge LEDs

The lower-right LED is reserved for internal charger/power status. This indicator is active even when the 7535 is inserted in a docking station (and in suspend mode) so that the charge status of the battery can be detected easily.

Function Charge LED Behaviour

External power not available.

Fully charged to within 95% of charge capacity.

LED off.

LED displays solid green colour.

Quick charge successfully completed to within 75% of charge capacity.

Charge in progress.

LED flashes slow green.

LED displays solid yellow colour.

Cell temperature out of range for charge.

LED flashes yellow.

Unable to charge battery.

Charge circuit failure.*

LED displays solid red colour.

LED flashes fast red.*

*If the charge fails, refer to the charger troubleshooting sections in Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices &

Accessories beginning on page 210 for helpful details.

Table 3.1 Charge LEDs

3.6.1.2

Radio Traffic LEDs

The upper-left LED on your 7535 flashes either orange or green to indicate when the radio transmits and receives data.

Note: Keep in mind that while the standard 802.11b radio supports the transmit/receive LED, not all radios support this function.

Function

Radio Transmit

Radio Receive

Radio Traffic LED Behaviour

LED flashes orange.

LED flashes green.

Table 3.2 Transmit and Receive LEDs

46 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 7535

Scan LEDs

3.6.1.3

Scan LEDs

Successful scans are indicated in two ways – with a scan LED and with an audio tone.

Function

Scan in progress

Successful scan

Unsuccessful scan

Scan LED Behaviour

LED displays solid red during scan.

LED displays solid green after decode.

Off when scan ended.

LED flashes red.

Table 3.3 Scan LED

3.6.2 Onscreen Indicators

The taskbar at the bottom of the screen displays a variety of system status indicators.

Figure 3.8 Taskbar

This display changes dynamically, and only those icons that are applicable are displayed. For example, if a radio is not installed in your 7535, the radio signal icon is not displayed in the taskbar.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 47

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 7535

Onscreen Indicators

Modifier Key Indicators

<SHIFT>, <CTRL>, <ALT>, <BLUE> and <ORANGE> are modifier keys that have onscreen indicators to show when a key is active or locked. If a modifier key is pressed once to activate it, the key is displayed in the taskbar in lowercase characters

– for example, pressing the <BLUE> key once displays blue key in the taskbar. If a modifier key is pressed twice, it is ‘locked on’ and the onscreen indicator is displayed in uppercase letters in the taskbar – for example, pressing <BLUE> twice displays BLUE KEY in the taskbar.

Battery Gauge

The battery shaped icon displayed in the taskbar provides a visual indication of the remaining battery power. The icon acts as a meter that is either full, at three-quarter level, half, quarter level or empty.

When the battery level is low – approximately 15 minutes from empty – a warning window pops up. When the battery power is completely depleted, a final warning window indicates that the 7535 will be powered down.

Full 75% 50% 25% Empty

Radio Signal Quality

Increasing radio signal quality is represented by longer, filled bars within this icon.

100%

Link Broken

Tethered Devices

When a peripheral is attached to the tether port and activated, an associated icon appears in the taskbar. The sample to the left indicates that a USB device is connected to the tether port.

Scanner USB Device RFID Serial Device Scan-See

48 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 7535

Audio Indicators

Docking Device

When a 7535 is inserted in a docking station, charger or cradle, an associated icon appears in the taskbar.

Gang Charger, Combo Charger

Combo Docking & Docking Station

Quad Docking Station Power Cradle Portable Docking

Module (PDM)

Security Level

Security levels can be set to limit access to the Windows CE operating system. In addition, applications can be restricted to prevent inadvertent changes.

3.6.3 Audio Indicators

The 7535 beeper provides a variety of sounds and can be configured to emit a sound when a key is pressed, a keyboard character is rejected, scan input is accepted or rejected, an operator’s entry does not match in a match field or the battery is low.

3.6.3.1

Adjusting The Beeper Volume

The volume function keys located along the top of the keyboard are used to adjust the beeper volume emitted from your 7535. The increase volume function key is labelled with a plus sign . The decrease volume key is labelled with a minus sign .

On 58-key keyboards, the volume function keys are accessed by pressing

<BLUE> <F5> and <F6>.

On 36-key keyboards, the volume function keys are accessed by pressing

<BLUE> < F3> and <F4>.

To increase the beeper volume:

• Press the <BLUE> key and then, the increase volume function key .

Repeat this key combination until the volume is sufficient for your needs.

To work more efficiently with these keys, refer to the note on page 50.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 49

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 7535

Internal Scanners

To decrease the beeper volume:

• Press the <BLUE> key and then, press the decrease volume function key . Repeat this key combination until the volume is low enough for your needs. To work more efficiently with these keys, refer to the note below.

Note: To adjust the beeper volume more quickly, lock the <BLUE> key “on” by pressing it twice. You can then press the appropriate volume function keys until the beeper volume suits your needs.

When you have satisfactorily adjusted the beeper volume, press the

<BLUE> key a third time to unlock or turn it off.

3.7 Internal Scanners

The scanner installed in your unit can be configured using the Scanner Properties dialogue box in the Control Panel .

The 7535 can be equipped with a:

• One dimensional (1D) internal laser scanner,

• Internal PDF laser scanner, or a

• Two dimensional (2D) internal imager scanner.

It is critical that you review the warnings listed in Section 3.7.1 on page 51 before using any of the scanners described in this chapter. “Scanning Techniques” on page 51 outlines the mechanics of a successful scan. In addition, review “Scan LED

Indicators” on page 52 to better understand how to interpret whether or not a bar code has been successfully scanned. Finally, “Troubleshooting” on page 52 provides some helpful suggestions should the scan fail.

50 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 7535

Warnings

3.7.1 Warnings

For your own safety, it is critical that you comply with the following warnings:

1. Do not look into the laser beam or point the beam at people or animals.

2. CAUTION – Using controls or adjustments, or performing procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

3. CAUTION – The use of optical instruments with this product will increase eye hazard.

4. This product contains a laser scanner that emits less than 1.0 mW average radiant power at a wavelength of 650 or 680 nm. This product complies with 21 CFR 1040.10, 1040.11 and DIN EN

60825: July 1993, and is classified as a Class 2 laser product. The

SE12xxALR has an average radiated power of 1.5 mW.

3.7.2 Scanning Techniques

Note: The scanning techniques described here apply to internal and external scanners.

• Hold the scanner at an angle. Do not hold it perpendicular to the bar code.

Do not hold the scanner directly over the bar code. In this position, light can reflect back into the scanner’s exit window and prevent a successful decode.

• Scan the entire bar code. If you are using a 1D or 2D scanner, make certain that the scan beam crosses every bar and space on the bar code, including the margins on either end of the symbol.

If you are using a 2D imaging scanner, make certain the red, oval shaped framing mark is centered within the bar code you want to scan.

• Hold the scanner farther away for larger bar codes.

• Hold the scanner closer for bar codes with bars that are close together.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 51

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 7535

Scan LED Indicators

3.7.3 Scan LED Indicators

The 7535 scanner LED (the lower-left LED) indicates whether or not your scan is successful. The LED behaves as follows:

• Scan In Progress: scan LED displays solid red colour.

• Successful Scan: scan LED displays solid green colour and turns off when the scan is ended.

• Unsuccessful scan: scan LED flashes red.

A bar code icon appears on the screen during a scan. While the scanner beam is active, the onscreen message states – SCANNING. If the scan is successful, the bar code data is displayed on the screen until the scan button (or pistol trigger) is released.

3.7.4 Troubleshooting

If the scanner is not working, investigate the following:

• Is the 7535 on?

• Check that the bar code symbology being scanned is enabled for the 7535 you are using. Check any other parameters that affect the scanning procedure or the bar code.

• Check the bar code to make sure it is not damaged. Try scanning a different bar code to verify that the problem is not with the bar code.

• Check that the bar code is within the proper range.

• Does the hand-held display the warning without scanning? This suggests a hardware problem in the 7535.

• Is the laser beam scanning across the bar code?

• Once the scan beam has stopped, check the scanner window for dirt or fogging.

52 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 7535

Operating One Dimensional (1D) Internal Laser Scanners

3.7.5 Operating One Dimensional (1D) Internal Laser Scanners

• Turn the 7535 on. Wait until the unit has booted up completely.

Important: If an aiming dot is available on the installed scanner, the dot will be enabled for a configurable time period (including off), after which normal scanning begins. Refer to “Dot Time” on page 136 for details.

Double-clicking the trigger will override the aiming delay and initiate an immediate scan. Note that the aiming dot is standard on long-range and high visibility internal scanners.

• Aim at the bar code and press the scan key or the trigger. A scan beam and a warning indicator appear until a successful decode is achieved or six seconds have elapsed.

3.7.6 Operating Internal PDF Laser Scanners

This scanner decodes PDF417 two-dimensional bar codes.

• Turn the 7535 on. Wait until the unit has booted up completely.

• Aim at the bar code and press the scan key or the trigger. The beam expands into a rectangle covering the bar code to properly scan it. The scan beam and a warning indicator are visible until a successful decode is achieved or three seconds have elapsed.

3.7.7 Operating Internal Two Dimensional (2D) Imager Scanners

An imager scanner takes a snap shot of a single bar code or multiple bar codes (at one time). It can find a bar code regardless of its orientation – that is, even a bar code printed at a 45 degree angle to the 7535 will be decoded successfully.

Because imager scanners generally have a shorter depth of field than laser scanners, some practise may be required to find the optimal distance from the types of bar codes being scanned. Although the imager includes illumination LEDs, ambient light will help the imager decode the bar codes, especially if the bar code is far from the 7535.

• Turn the 7535 computer on. Wait until the unit has booted up completely.

• Aim at the bar code and press the scan key or the trigger.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 53

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 7535

Connecting & Disconnecting Tethered Peripherals

• When the scan button or trigger is pressed, a red, oval shaped light (the framing marker) is displayed. Centre the framing marker in the field – either in the centre of the bar code you want to scan or in the centre of the area in which multiple bar codes are to be scanned.

Illumination LEDs will flash and a picture of the bar code(s) is taken.

3.8 Connecting & Disconnecting Tethered Peripherals

Tethered peripherals such as scanners and printers connect to the hand-held computer with a quick release, circular connector. When a peripheral is connected to the hand-held, the 7535 detects the peripheral and loads the necessary drivers for it.

An icon in the taskbar at the bottom of the screen provides a visual representation of the peripheral and indicates that it is ready for operation.

To attach the peripheral to the round, tether port on the side of the 7535:

• Insert the barrel of the plug into the tether port and rotate slowly until it clicks into place. The red dot on the port and on the connector should be aligned.

Figure 3.9 Attaching The Cable To The Tether Port

54 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 7535

Monitoring The Battery And Maximizing Run Time

To remove the peripheral:

• Grasp the shell of the plug, and pull it back gently to unlock and release the connector.

Figure 3.10 Disconnecting The Tether Cable

Important: Never attempt to disconnect a peripheral by pulling the connector by the wire. The connector is locked into place and can only be unlocked and removed by pulling back the plug shell.

3.9 Monitoring The Battery And Maximizing Run Time

Under normal operating conditions, the battery lasts for a full 8-hour shift. As

Lithium-Ion batteries age, their capacity decreases gradually, and they are generally considered depleted after approximately 2 years of use (less than 60% of original capacity remaining). Keep in mind however that heavy usage or operating the 7535 at temperature extremes will shorten the battery life.

Lithium-Ion batteries do not require conditioning cycles and the 7535 battery system (including chargers) requires no user interaction to maintain peak performance.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 55

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 7535

Monitoring The Battery And Maximizing Run Time

To maximize the run time of your batteries, consider the following:

• The display backlight is the largest drain on the battery. Try to keep its brightness as low as possible.

• The hand-held is ‘event’ driven – that is, when the unit is not in use, it reverts to sleep mode (even when it appears to be running), saving battery power. Events include a key press, touchscreen taps and scan triggers.

Power consumption is reduced if you avoid unnecessary events, and allow the unit to sleep as much as possible.

• The 7535 battery is a ‘smart battery’ with built-in intelligence. The taskbar battery icon is a linear gauge used to estimate the remaining run time of the battery. It is important to note that the battery capacity icon displays quarter percentages of nominal capacity (the capacity of a new battery). An aged battery, even when fully charged, shows somewhat less capacity than nominal.

Double-tapping on the battery icon displays a dialogue box that provides detailed information about the battery status and performance. If the remaining capacity indication seems inaccurate, the battery may need recalibration. Recalibration requires that the battery be fully charged, discharged and then charged again before use. If the battery is fully discharged and

charged on a regular basis, recalibration should not be necessary.

• When the hand-held is switched off, it goes into a low-power, suspend state but continues to draw a small amount of power from the battery. This should not be an issue unless the unit is left in suspend state for more than a week – in this case, the battery should be removed.

• Batteries left for durations of more than one or two months should be fully charged, discharged and then charged again before use. This recalibrates the gas gauge and allows the internal electronics to determine the actual capacity of the battery.

• The hand-held can determine when the useful life of the battery has expired and will notify the user. Chargers may reject batteries that have exceeded their lifespan.

56 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 7535

Monitoring The Network Connection

3.10 Monitoring The Network Connection

If your hand-held is equipped with a wireless LAN radio, it will typically associate with the nearest access point. The radio signal quality meter in the taskbar indicates the relative strength of the communication link.

To access the radio signal icon from the keyboard:

• Press <BLUE> <0> to display the System Menu .

• Choose System Tray from the menu.

• Use the <LEFT> and <RIGHT> arrow keys to highlight the radio signal icon in the taskbar.

• Press <ENTER> to display the radio quality dialogue box.

If you have a touchscreen:

• Tap on the radio icon in the taskbar to display the radio quality dialogue box.

Note: Moving in and out of the radio coverage area can have varying effects on a network session. At times, you may need to renew your connection by logging in again.

3.11 Uploading Data In A Docking Station

The Combo Docking and Quad Docking peripherals allow the 7535 to link to an

Ethernet network. They are typically used to upload transaction data to a server computer when a radio link in not available. When a 7535 is properly inserted in a docking station, a dock icon is displayed in the taskbar at the bottom of the 7535 screen. The 7535 also detects the presence of the Ethernet network. Review the documentation provided with the user application installed in your 7535 before preforming data uploads.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 57

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 7535

General Maintenance

3.12 General Maintenance

3.12.1 Caring For The Touchscreen

The top of the touchscreen is a thin, flexible polyester plastic sheet with a conductive coating on the inside. The polyester can be permanently damaged by harsh chemicals and is susceptible to abrasions and scratches. Using sharp objects on the touchscreen can scratch or cut the plastic, or crack the internal conductive coating.

The chemicals listed below must not come into contact with the touchscreen:

• mustard,

• sodium hydroxide,

• concentrated caustic solutions,

• benzyl alcohol, and

• concentrated miner acids.

If the touchscreen is used in harsh environments, consider applying a disposable screen protector (PN 1010029). These covers reduce the clarity of the display slightly but will dramatically extend the useful life of the touchscreen. When they become scratched and abraded, they are easily removed and replaced.

Note: If the environment is excessively harsh, consider using a tempered glass version of the 7535.

3.12.2 Cleaning The 7535

Important: Do not immerse the unit in water. Dampen a soft cloth with mild detergent to wipe the unit clean.

• Use only mild detergent or soapy water to clean the hand-held unit.

• Avoid abrasive cleaners, solvents or strong chemicals for cleaning. The

7535 has a plastic case that is susceptible to harsh chemicals. The plastic is partially soluble in oils, mineral spirits and gasoline. The plastic slowly decomposes in strong alkaline solutions.

• To clean ink marks from the keypad and touchscreen, use isopropyl alcohol.

58 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

W

ORKING

W

ITH

W

INDOWS

CE

4.1 Navigating In Windows CE And Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

4.1.1 Navigating Using A Touchscreen And Stylus . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

4.1.2 Navigating Using The Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

4.2 Working With Files, Folders And Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

4.3 The Startup Desktop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

4.3.1 Accessing Desktop Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

4.3.2 The Taskbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

4.3.2.1 Using The Taskbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

4.4 The System Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

4.5 Using A Dialogue Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 59

Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE

Navigating In Windows CE And Applications

4.1 Navigating In Windows CE And Applications

Graphic user interfaces like Windows CE for portable devices and desktop Windows

(2000, XP, etc.) utilize ‘point and click’ navigation. An equivalent keyboard shortcut is also available for every ‘point and click’ action.

Windows CE supports the same ‘point and click’ user interface and keyboard shortcuts as desktop Windows with one difference – the ‘point and click’ action is accomplished using a touchscreen rather than a mouse. Actions can be performed using any combination of keyboard shortcuts or touchscreen tapping (provided your

7535 is equipped with a touchscreen).

4.1.1 Navigating Using A Touchscreen And Stylus

Note: If the touch screen is not registering your screen taps accurately, the touchscreen may need recalibration. Refer to “Calibrating The Touchscreen” on page 44.

A touchscreen is an optional feature. A 7535 equipped with a touchscreen has a

stylus – a pointing tool that looks like a pen – stored in a slot at the top of the 7535.

The stylus is used to select objects on the touchscreen.

Note: To prevent damage to the touchscreen, use only the stylus (pen) supplied with your 7535.

To open a file, launch an applet or open a folder:

• Double-tap the stylus on the appropriate icon.

4.1.2 Navigating Using The Keyboard

If your 7535 has a standard screen (rather than a touchscreen), choosing icons and navigating dialogue boxes, displaying the desktop, and so on requires keyboard input. If your unit has already been fully configured and your application is launched at startup, you’ll have little need for keyboard navigation.

Refer to “Working With Files, Folders And Programs” on page 62 for additional details keyboard navigation.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 61

Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE

Working With Files, Folders And Programs

Keep in mind that unlike a desktop computer, the 7535 does not support key chording (pressing two keys at the same time). You must press one key followed by the next in sequence.

Operation

Move the cursor

Open file, folder or icon

Exit & Save

Close/Exit & Do Not Save

Navigate Dialogue Boxes

Select Radio Button/Press Button

Go to System Menu

Arrow keys

Key or Key Combination

<ENTER>

<ENTER>

<ESC>

<TAB>

To move cursor up <SHIFT> <TAB>

<SPACE>

<BLUE><0>

Table 4.1 Keyboard Navigation

4.2 Working With Files, Folders And Programs

Folder

File

Program Icon

Figure 4.1 Working With Windows Icons

• Use the arrow keys to highlight the icon you want to open or launch.

• Press <ENTER>.

Note: Keep in mind that as with any Microsoft® Windows® program, you can also highlight an icon, press <ALT> and type the letter <F> to open the

File menu. Then you can choose the Open command to open an icon.

62 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE

The Startup Desktop

If you have a touchscreen:

• Double-tap on the appropriate icon – either a folder icon, a program icon or a file icon – to open or launch your selection.

4.3 The Startup Desktop

When the 7535 boots up, the startup desktop (shell) is displayed. Any applications stored in the Startup folder will start up immediately.

Figure 4.2 The 7535 Startup Desktop

4.3.1 Accessing Desktop Icons

• Use the arrow keys to highlight the icon, and press <ENTER> to launch the highlighted icon.

If you have a touchscreen:

• Tap on the icon to open a window or, in the case of an application icon, launch an application.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 63

Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE

The Taskbar

4.3.2 The Taskbar

Figure 4.3 The Taskbar

The 7535 is equipped with a taskbar at the bottom of the screen. It displays icons through which you can view the security level, battery capacity and radio signal quality of your unit. If the hand-held is attached to a charger, cradle, docking station or PDM, an associated icon is displayed.

The taskbar also displays active modifier keys – <SHIFT>, <ALT>, <CTRL>,

<BLUE> and <ORANGE>. Keys that have been locked “on” are displayed in

uppercase letters. For example, if you press the <CTRL> key twice to lock it “on”, it is displayed as CTRL KEY in the taskbar.

4.3.2.1

Using The Taskbar

• Press <BLUE> <0> to display the

System Menu

.

• Type <Y> to choose System Tray from the menu.

• Use the arrow keys to highlight the icon in the taskbar about which you’d like more information.

• Press <SPACE> to display the appropriate dialogue box.

If you have a touchscreen:

• Using the stylus, tap on the indicator you want to view – the battery icon for example – to display a dialogue box listing the current battery capacity information.

64 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE

The System Menu

4.4 The System Menu

The

System Menu

lists the operations you can access and work with. It is available from the startup desktop or from within any application.

To display the menu:

• Press <BLUE> <0> (zero).

Figure 4.4 System Menu

• Use the arrow keys to highlight a menu item, and press <ENTER>, or

If the menu item has an underlined character:

• Type the underlined alpha character – for example, to display Windows

Explorer , type the letter e.

If you have a touchscreen:

• Tap on the item in the menu with which you want to work.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 65

Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE

The System Menu

The Control Panel

The

Control Panel

contains applets used to configure hardware, the operating system and the shell. If your 7535 is running with the Psion Teklogix Tekterm application or another application, additional configuration applets may appear in the

Control Panel

.

Figure 4.5 Control Panel

The Desktop

Choosing the Desktop option from the

System Menu

displays the 7535 desktop.

The Explorer

The Psion Teklogix Explorer application operates much like the standard

Windows® Explorer. It is used to open, create, delete, rename and otherwise manipulate files and folders.

The Security Level

The 7535 shell displays the levels of security you can choose form. To change security levels:

• Choose Security Level from the

System Menu

.

• Select a security level from the dialogue box, and type the appropriate password.

66 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE

The System Menu

The System Tray

The System Tray option allows access to the icons in the taskbar at the bottom of the screen. The taskbar displays indicators such as a battery capacity gauge and the security level. These indicators are attached to dialogue boxes that provide additional information.

• Choose System Tray from the

System Menu

.

When System Tray is chosen, the taskbar icons become accessible. To display the dialogue box attached to an icon:

• Use the arrow keys to highlight an icon – for example – the security icon.

• Press <SPACE> to display the security level dialogue box.

If you have a touchscreen:

• Tap on the icon with which you want to work. The associated dialogue box is displayed.

The Task Manager

The Task Manager option allows you to switch to another task or to end an active task. To display the task manager window:

• Press <BLUE><0><T>, or

• Press <ALT> <ESC>.

Note: When the 7535 security level is set to ‘Supervisor’, all the buttons in the sample screen above are accessible. If the security level is set to ‘User’, the ‘Run’ and ‘End Task’ buttons are not visible.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 67

Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE

Using A Dialogue Box

Cycle Tasks

When Cycle Tasks is selected (and the Task Manager is not open), you can cycle through active applications. To choose this option:

• Press <BLUE><0>, and type <C>, or

• Press <ALT> <TAB>.

Power Info

Selecting Power Info from the

System Menu

displays the

Power Properties

dialogue box. This dialogue box indicates the remaining charge capacity of the battery.

4.5 Using A Dialogue Box

A dialogue box like the samples in Figure 4.6 appears when you need to make selections and enter further information.

You can move between dialogue items by tapping on them, or by pressing the arrow keys and the <TAB> key. (<SHIFT> <TAB> moves the cursor backwards.)

Tabs

Radio

Button

Textbox

Checkbox Button

Dropdown Menu

Figure 4.6 Dialogue Boxes

Note: If your unit is equipped with a touchscreen, you can use the stylus to tap on an element in a dialogue box to select or deselect it, display dropdown menu items, save your selections, and so on.

68 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE

Using A Dialogue Box

Dialogue boxes contain one or more of the following elements:

Tab: A tab separates different elements of a dialogue box. Press the <TAB> key until the left-most tab in the dialogue box is highlighted. To select the next tab, press the <RIGHT> arrow key.

Textbox: A textbox requires that you type information. Press the <TAB> key to highlight the textbox and then type the appropriate information.

Dropdown: This type of menu is identified by up and down arrows next to the dropdown menu to indicate that additional options are available. Press the <TAB> key to highlight the menu, and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to cycle through the options.

Checkbox: This box allows you to select or deselect an option. To select or deselect a checkbox, press the <TAB> key to highlight the checkbox, and press the

<SPACE> key to select (

√

) or deselect it.

Radio buttons: These buttons allow you to choose from a number of options. For example, in the sample screen in Figure 4.6 on page 68 you can choose to

‘Obtain an

IP address via DHCP’

or

‘Specify an IP address’

. Press the <TAB> key to highlight a radio button option, and then select a radio button by pressing the arrow keys to highlight the appropriate option.

Buttons: This type of button allows you to ‘Save’, ‘Delete’ and so on the options you’ve chosen in a dialogue box. Use the <TAB> key to highlight the button you want to use. Press the <ENTER> key to activate it.

Saving Your Choices: Once you’ve made all your changes, press the <ENTER> key to save your changes and exit the window.

Note: A dialogue box item that is displayed in grey text indicates that it is not currently available.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 69

C

ONFIGURATION

5.1 The Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

5.2 Control Panel Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

5.3 Basic Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

5.3.1 Display Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

5.3.1.1 Display Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

5.3.1.2 Display Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

5.3.1.3 Display Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

5.3.2 Keyboard Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

5.3.2.1 Key Repeat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

5.3.2.2 Keyboard Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

5.3.2.3 Keyboard One Shot Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

5.3.3 Power Management Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

5.3.3.1 Battery Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

5.3.3.2 Power Saving Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

5.3.4 Calibrating The Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

5.4 Advanced Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

5.5 Scanner Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

5.5.1 Scanner Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

5.5.2 Bar Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

5.5.3 Bar Code Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

5.5.3.1 Code 39 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

5.5.3.2 Code 128 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

5.5.3.3 EAN 13 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

5.5.3.4 EAN 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

5.5.3.5 UPC And EAN Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

5.5.3.6 UPC A Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

5.5.3.7 UPC E Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

5.5.3.8 Codabar Size And Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

5.5.3.9 Code 93 Size And Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

5.5.3.10 Code 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

5.5.3.11 I 2 of 5 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

5.5.3.11 I 2 of 5 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 71

5.5.3.12 MSI/PLESSY Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

5.5.3.13 D 2 of 5 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

5.5.3.14 IATA 2 of 5 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

5.5.3.15 Postal: Australian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

5.5.3.16 Postal: Japanese . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

5.5.3.17 Postal: Korean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

5.5.3.18 Postal: PlaNET. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

5.5.3.19 Postal: PostNET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

5.5.3.20 Postal: Royal Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

5.5.3.21 DataMatrix (2D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

5.5.3.22 Maxicode (2D). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

5.5.3.23 PDF-417 (2D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

5.5.3.24 Micro PDF-417 (2D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

5.5.3.25 QR Code (2D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

5.5.3.26 RSS Code (2D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

5.5.3.27 Aztec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Chapter 5: Configuration

The Control Panel

5.1 The Control Panel

The Windows CE

Control Panel

provides a group of icons through which you can set a variety of system-wide properties, such as mouse sensitivity, network configuration and the desktop color scheme.

Note: If you are uncertain how to move around a dialogue box and make selections, review “Using A Dialogue Box” on page 68.

When the 7535 boots up, the startup desktop (shell) is displayed, and any applications stored in the Startup folder start up immediately.

To access the Windows CE

Control Panel

:

• Press BLUE> <0> to display the

System Menu

.

• Highlight

Control Panel ,

and press <ENTER>.

If you have a touchscreen:

• Use the stylus to tap on the

Control Panel

icon on your desktop.

The

Control Panel

folder contains icons used in the setup of your 7535.

Figure 5.1 Control Panel

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 73

Chapter 5: Configuration

Control Panel Icons

5.2 Control Panel Icons

The Windows CE

Control Panel

provides a group of icons that allow you to customize and adjust settings on your 7535.

Date/Time

Allows you to set the current Month, Date, Time and Time Zone on your unit.

Display

Changes the appearance (window colour scheme) on the unit desktop.

Keyboard

Toggles character repeat on and off and specifies delay and rate for repeated characters. It also allows you to adjust the keyboard backlight threshold and intensity.

Volume & Sound

Allows you to adjust the volume of the beep that is emitted to indicate events like warnings, key clicks and, if your unit is equipped with a touchscreen, screen taps.

Sounds (wave files) cannot be reproduced on 7535 units. The beeper volume and the conditions under which it sounds are tailored from within the application installed on your unit.

Mouse Properties

For units equipped with touchscreens, this icon allows you to customize the sensitivity and speed of the stylus double-click.

Owner

Provides fields in which you can specify owner information. A ‘

Notes

’ tab allows additional information to be entered and displayed when the unit is powered up. ‘

Network ID

’ tab information is used to access network resources.

(This information should be provided by your System Administrator.)

74 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 5: Configuration

Control Panel Icons

Password

Allows you to assign a password to restrict access to elements of the unit.

Once assigned, password access cannot be circumvented so it is important that you write down your password and keep it in a safe place.

Power

Displays battery pack power status. The ‘

Power Scheme

’ tab allows you to define power saving modes. You can define the number of minutes after which the units becomes ‘

User Idle

’, ‘

System Idle

’ and when the unit will go into a ‘

Suspend

’ state to preserve battery power. (Refer to “Power Saving

Schemes” on page 84 for details.) A ‘

Device

’ tab lists device names and power levels.

Alternately, battery status can be accessed through the taskbar.

Regional Settings

Allows you to specify the local language the display text will use along with the format of numbers, currency, time and date for your region.

Remove Programs

Lists the programs that can be removed from your unit. To remove a program, select it and then click on the

Remove

button.

S tylus

Adjusts how Windows CE recognizes your double-tap (as slow or rapid successive taps).

Under the ‘

Calibration

’ tab, you can recalibrate your touchscreen by tapping on the ‘Recalibrate’ button and following the directions on the calibration screen.

System

Displays system and memory properties. Under the

Memory

tab, you can allocate memory between storage memory and program memory.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 75

Chapter 5: Configuration

Basic Setup

Dialing

Specifies dialing settings, including area code, country code, dial type and the code to disable call waiting. You can store multiple patterns – for example, ‘Work’, ‘Home’, and so on using this dialogue box.

PC Connection

Enables direct connections to a desktop computer. Selecting the ‘

Change Connection

’ button allows you to change the type of direct connect to your PC.

Network And Dial-up Connections

Displays a network window from which the 7535 radio can be configured and an existing configuration can be executed. Refer to “Configuring An

IEEE 802.11 Radio” on page 18 for details.

Note: This icon also provides access to direct or dial-up connections.

This particular feature is reserved for future use.

5.3 Basic Setup

5.3.1 Display Properties

• In the

Control Panel

, choose the

Display

icon.

Figure 5.2 Choosing The Display Icon

76 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 5: Configuration

Display Contrast

5.3.1.1

Display Contrast

To improve the clarity of the characters on the screen, the 7535 contrast can be adjusted using the

Display Properties

dialogue box.

• In the Display Properties dialogue box, open the Contrast tab.

Figure 5.3 Display Contrast Properties

The

‘Min – Max’

sliding bar is used to adjust the screen contrast. Sliding the bar to the left darkens the screen, and sliding it to the right lightens it.

5.3.1.2

Display Backlight

The backlight is activated for a configurable amount of time if the ambient light is below a specified threshold and if the 7535 is in use (key press, scanner trigger or data received from the host). The

Display Properties

dialogue box in the

Control Panel

allows you to specify the intensity of the backlight along with how the backlight behaves in low-light conditions and when the unit is not in use.

Note: Keep in mind that this option may be restricted to supervisory use only.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 77

Chapter 5: Configuration

Display Backlight

• In the Display Properties dialogue box, open the Backlight tab.

Figure 5.4 Display Backlight Properties

Important: The backlight can be configured to stay on continuously, but this will cause a significant drain on the battery power.

The Backlight tab allows you to specify the backlight ‘On Threshold’, ‘Intensity’ and

‘OFF Timeout’.

ON Threshold

The 7535 is equipped with an ambient light sensor. This sliding bar allows you to determine how dark the ambient light needs to be before the backlight turns on.

78 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 5: Configuration

Display Appearance

Intensity

This parameter is used to adjust the light intensity of the 7535 screen. Sliding the bar to the left lowers the light intensity, and sliding it to the right raises the intensity.

OFF Timeout

The value chosen from this dropdown menu determines the duration of time that the backlight stays on when a unit is not in use

5.3.1.3

Display Appearance

• In the Display Properties dialogue box, open the Appearance tab.

Figure 5.5 Display Appearance Properties

This dialogue box allows you to customize the display colour scheme.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 79

Chapter 5: Configuration

Keyboard Properties

5.3.2 Keyboard Properties

This menu item displays the Keyboard Properties dialogue box in which you can adjust the repeat rate of the keys, the intensity of the keyboard backlight and the behaviour of the <BLUE> and <ORANGE> modifier keys.

• In the

Control Panel

, choose the

Keyboard

icon.

Figure 5.6 Choosing The Keyboard Icon

5.3.2.1

Key Repeat

In the Keyboard Properties dialogue box, open the Repeat tab.

Figure 5.7 Key Repeat Properties

80 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 5: Configuration

Keyboard Backlight

Repeat Delay

The value assigned for this parameter determines the delay in milliseconds between repeat characters. Sliding the

Repeat Delay

bar to the left increases the delay between key repeats while sliding the bar to the right shortens the repeat delay time.

Repeat Rate

The value assigned for the

Repeat Rate

parameter determines how quickly the key you press repeats and is measured in characters per second (cps). Sliding the bar to the left slows the repeat rate, and sliding the bar to the right increases the repeat rate.

Note: Use the field at the bottom of this dialogue box to test the repeat delay and rate settings you’ve chosen.

5.3.2.2

Keyboard Backlight

• In the Keyboard Properties dialogue box, open the Backlight tab.

Figure 5.8 Keyboard Backlight Properties

ON Threshold

The

ON Threshold

sliding bar allows you to determine how dark the ambient light needs to be before the keyboard backlight turns on.

Intensity

This parameter is used to adjust the light intensity of the 7535 keyboard backlight.

Sliding the bar to the left darkens the keyboard backlight intensity, and sliding it to the right lightens the intensity.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 81

Chapter 5: Configuration

Keyboard One Shot Modes

5.3.2.3

Keyboard One Shot Modes

• In the Keyboard Properties dialogue box, open the One Shots tab.

Figure 5.9 Keyboard One Shot Properties

When these options are enabled (

√

), the <ORANGE> and <BLUE> keys only remain active until the next key is pressed. If the ‘One Shots’ options are disabled

(the checkbox is left blank), the <ORANGE> and <BLUE> keys are locked ‘on’ when pressed only once; they remain ‘on’ until they are pressed a second time to unlock them.

Note: Keep in mind that the taskbar at the bottom of the screen displays these keys in uppercase characters –

BLUE KEY

and

ORANGE KEY

– only when they are locked ‘on’.

82 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 5: Configuration

Power Management Properties

5.3.3 Power Management Properties

This menu item displays a Power Properties dialogue box that indicates the unit’s battery capacity and allows you to manage battery use.

• In the

Control Panel

, choose the

Power

icon.

Figure 5.10 Choosing The Power Icon

5.3.3.1

Battery Capacity

• In the Power Properties dialogue box, open the Battery tab.

Figure 5.11 Power Battery Properties

The

Battery

tab details information about the battery installed in your 7535.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 83

Chapter 5: Configuration

Power Saving Schemes

5.3.3.2

Power Saving Schemes

• In the Power Properties dialogue box, open the Schemes tab.

Figure 5.12 Power Scheme Properties

Note: The Power Properties

Scheme

settings are cumulative – that is, to determine when the 7535 enters ‘Suspend’ state, the unit waits for the ‘User Idle’ state to elapse, followed by the ‘System Idle’ state and then, once the

‘Suspend’ state time has elapsed, ‘Suspend’ state is activated.

When setting the

User Idle State

,

System Idle State

and

Suspend State

, keep the following in mind. Because the 7535 ‘wakes up’ from the

User Idle

and

System Idle

states almost instantaneously following any user input (keypress, trigger press, screen tap), the timeouts you set will not slow user activity. The sum of the

User Idle

,

System Idle

and

Suspend

timeouts should be selected carefully since the 7535 will go to sleep (appear off) when this time has elapsed, saving battery power. Psion Teklogix recommends starting with a total of 10 minutes for this timeout. Setting any of these timeouts to

‘Never’ will adversely affect the battery run time.

To further reduce power consumption, carefully consider the duration of time that the display backlight is ‘on’ (see “Display Backlight” on page 77).

Power Scheme

This dropdown menu allows you to identify whether the unit is using

AC Power

or

Battery Power

.

User Idle State

User Idle

means that the 7535 is not receiving any user input including activities like a key touch, a scan, and so on – any user initiated activity. When the time selected in the ‘

Switch state to User Idle

’ menu elapses, the hand-held enters a

User Idle

state and begins to monitor the time specified in the

System Idle

state menu.

84 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 5: Configuration

Calibrating The Touchscreen

System Idle State

System activity includes computer activity such as serial data, an activity initiated by an application, and so on – any activity not executed by the user.

System Idle

is activated when the time specified in the ‘

Switch state to User Idle

’ and the ‘

Switch state to

System Idle

’ menu have elapsed without any activity. The 7535 begins to monitor the

Suspend

field.

Suspend State

Once the time specified in the

User Idle

and the

System Idle

fields have elapsed, the 7535 begins to count down the time specified in the ‘

Switch state to Suspend

’. When the time in the

Suspend

field elapses, the unit enters

Suspend

state.

In

Suspend

state, the 7535 CPU enters a sleep state and all peripherals are powered down to minimize power consumption. The state of the device (RAM contents) is preserved. Pressing <ENTER> or the <SCAN> button wakes the system from suspend state. When the 7535 is in suspend state, the network connection is broken.

To resume, you must re-establish the network connection.

5.3.4 Calibrating The Touchscreen

Note: Touchscreen calibration may not be enabled on your unit. If your screen appears to require recalibration, contact your supervisor.

Touchscreens rarely require recalibration. However, if your touchscreen has never been calibrated or if you find that the stylus pointer is not accurate when you tap on an item, follow the directions below.

• In the Control Panel , select the Stylus icon to display the Stylus Properties window.

Figure 5.13 Stylus Icon

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 85

Chapter 5: Configuration

Advanced Configuration

• Choose the Calibration tab and then the Recalibrate button.

Figure 5.14 Calibration Screen

• Follow the directions on the calibration screen to recalibrate the screen.

5.4 Advanced Configuration

5.5 Scanner Properties

The

Scanner Properties

icon in the

Control Panel

provides dialogue boxes in which you can tailor bar code options and choose the bar codes your scanner will recognize.

Figure 5.15 Bar Code Options

86 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 5: Configuration

Scanner Options

5.5.1 Scanner Options

Verify

The value entered for this parameter determines the number of correct additional decodes required after the initial decode before a bar code is accepted. Higher values significantly increase the time it takes to decode a bar code but also improve the reliability of the decoded bar code.

Security

This parameter controls the tolerance for decoding edge-to-edge bar codes

(Code 93, Code 128, UPC/EAN). Lower values have a lower tolerance for misreads, but they also increase the time it takes to decode the bar code. The default value of

30 is generally a good compromise setting.

Short Code

When enabled (

√

), this parameter allows scanning of short I 2 of 5 bar codes (2 characters). When disabled, these short bar codes are rejected.

Enabling “Short Code” may reduce the robustness of the decoding since the

7535 must decode more potential bar codes; it is therefore not recommended for general-purpose bar codes with 4 or more characters.

Double Click Options

Click Time

Note: This parameter only affects 7535s using scanners with aiming dot capability.

This parameter controls the maximum gap time (in milliseconds) for a double-click.

If the time between the first and second clicks of the scanner trigger is within this time, it is considered a double-click. The allowable range is 0 to 1000 . A value of zero disables this feature.

A double-click produces different results depending on whether or not a value is assigned in the “Click Data” parameter. When a value is not assigned for the “Click

Data”, double-clicking the scanner trigger overrides the target dot delay set in the

“Dot Time” parameter and initiates a normal scan sweep. If a value is assigned for the “Click Data” parameter, double-clicking the scanner trigger inserts the “Click

Data” value rather than initiating a scan.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 87

Chapter 5: Configuration

Scanner Options

Click Data

For both integrated and external scanners, this parameter determines which character is sent to the application installed in your 7535 following a double-click.

Enter the ASCII value of the character desired from 0 to 255 . You can also press the

<LEFT> or <RIGHT> arrow keys to scroll through a set of ASCII characters not available from the keyboard.

Display Options

Indicator

When this parameter is enabled (

√

), the laser warning logo appears on the display whenever the scanner is activated.

Result

When this parameter is enabled (

√

), the type of bar code and the result of the scan appear on the screen. Note that this information is only displayed after a successful decode and is visible only while the scanner trigger is pressed. When the trigger is released, this information is cleared from the screen.

Dot Time

The value selected for “Dot Time” determines how long the targeting dot remains on before the scanner switches to a normal scan sweep. The allowable values are:

0, 0.1, 0.5, 1.0, 1.5, 2.0, 2.5 and 3.0 seconds. A value of 0 (zero) disables the target dot.

Result Time

The value assigned to the “Result Time” parameter determines how long the scan results of a successful scan are displayed on the screen. Time is measured in seconds, and a value of “0” (zero) disables the parameter.

Note: To remove the scan result from the screen before the “Result Time” has expired, perform an unsuccessful scan.

88 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 5: Configuration

Bar Codes

5.5.2 Bar Codes

Figure 5.16 Bar Code Selection

All the available bar code symbologies can be selected from this menu. For each symbology, there are options in a ‘Settings’ and a ‘Size/Char’ sub-menu. The unit automatically discriminates between the selected codes. Some restrictions may apply.

Important: To improve the decode speed and performance, enable (

√

) only those codes that are required by the application.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 89

Chapter 5: Configuration

Bar Code Settings

5.5.3 Bar Code Settings

Figure 5.17 Code 39 Bar Code Settings

Note: Options that are not available with a particular bar code are displayed in grey characters like the ‘Addendum’ option in the sample screen above and are not accessible in the dialogue box.

5.5.3.1

Code 39 Settings

Full Ascii

If this parameter is enabled (

√

), the characters +, %, and / are used as escape characters. The combination of an escape character and the next character is converted to an equivalent ASCII character.

Include Chk

If this parameter is enabled (

√

), the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data.

AIAG Strip

If this parameter is enabled (

√

), the AIAG data identifier is removed from each decoded Code 39 label. The data identifier occurs in the first position next to the

Code 39 start character. It can be a single alphabetic character or a series of numeric digits followed by an alphabetic character. This identifier defines the general category or specific use of the data contained in the rest of the bar code.

90 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 5: Configuration

Code 39 Settings

Note: If your unit is operating with the Psion Teklogix TESS application, this parameter should not be used in conjunction with the TESS AIAG feature.

This is because the 7535 hand-held performs the strip function before it processes the data through the AIAG feature; if the prefix is stripped, the data is not identified as AIAG.

Err Accept

If the “Err Accept” and “AIAG Strip” parameters are enabled (

√

), all label data without an AIAG identifier character is accepted. If the “Err Accept” parameter is disabled and the “AIAG Strip” parameter is enabled (

√

), the label data is not accepted.

Mod Chks

Mod 43 Chk

If this parameter is enabled (

√

), the Mod 43 check digit is calculated.

Mod 10 Chk

If this parameter is enabled (

√

), the Mod 10 check digit is calculated.

None

If you choose ‘None’, a check is not executed.

Size/Chars

Figure 5.18 Size And Character Settings

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 91

Chapter 5: Configuration

Code 39 Settings

Field Size

The field size is the length of the field after the first character is stripped and the prefix and suffix characters are added. If the field size is non-zero, only bar codes of that length are passed through.

Prefix Char

This character, if non-zero, is added before a successfully decoded bar code.

Enter the ASCII decimal equivalent of this character. Enter a value of 0 (zero) if no prefix is to be added.

Suffix Char

This character, if non-zero, is added after a successfully decoded bar code.

Enter the ASCII decimal equivalent of this character. Enter a value of 0 (zero) if no suffix is to be added.

Strip Leading

This parameter determines the number of characters that will be removed from the beginning of the bar code before the prefix character is added.

Notes: 1.

The appended character is treated as any other keyboard character.

For example, if <BKSP> is pressed, the usual action for that key is performed. If your unit is operating with the Psion Teklogix ANSI emulation application, the 7535 transmits the escape sequence associated with the function immediately after the bar code data.

2. For Code 39 bar codes, the “AIAG Strip” is performed before the

“Strip Leading”.

Strip Trailing

The value entered in this parameter determines the number of characters that will be removed from the end of the bar code before the suffix character is added.

92 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

5.5.3.2

Code 128 Settings

Chapter 5: Configuration

Code 128 Settings

Figure 5.19 Code 128 Bar Code Options

Include Sym

Enabling (

√

) “Include Sym” causes the group separator(s) and start code contained in this type of bar code to be displayed on the screen.

Note: This option is available only when ‘EAN/UCC 128’ is selected.

Variations

When using Code 128, you can choose the variation or type of bar code variation the scanner will recognize. The options available are Standard , UCC and EAN/UCC .

These options are described below.

Standard

Enable (

√

) “Standard” if Code 128 is desired.

UCC 128

“UCC” is a variation of Code 128.

EAN/UCC 128

To successfully scan this type of bar code, “EAN/UCC” must be enabled (

√

).

“EAN/UCC” bar codes include group separators and start codes.

Size/Chars

Refer to the description beginning on page 91 for details.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 93

Chapter 5: Configuration

EAN 13 Settings

5.5.3.3

EAN 13 Settings

Figure 5.20 Ean 13 Settings

Inc Country

If this parameter is enabled (

√

), the country code is included with the decoded bar code data.

Include Chk

If this parameter is enabled (

√

), the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data.

Addendum

Important: Before “Addendum” can take effect, the “Short Code” parameter in the Options menu (see page 87) must be enabled (

√

).

An addendum is a separate bar code, supplementary to the main bar code.

This parameter provides three options: Disabled, Optional and Required .

Depending on the value chosen for this parameter, an addendum is recognized or ignored.

When “Addendum” is set to Disabled, the scanner does not recognize an addendum. If this parameter is set to Optional, the scanner searches for an addendum and if one exists, appends it to the main bar code. When the parameter is set to Required, the scanner does not accept the main bar code without an addendum.

94 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 5: Configuration

EAN 13 Settings

Size/Chars

Figure 5.21 Size/Char Dialogue Box

Prefix Char

This character, if non-zero, is added before a successfully decoded bar code.

Enter the ASCII decimal equivalent of this character. Enter a value of 0 (zero) if no prefix is to be added.

Suffix Char

This character, if non-zero, is added after a successfully decoded bar code.

Enter the ASCII decimal equivalent of this character. Enter a value of 0 (zero) if no suffix is to be added.

Strip Leading

This parameter determines the number of characters that will be removed from the beginning of the bar code before the prefix character is added.

Note: 1.The appended character is treated as any other keyboard character. For example, if <BKSP> is pressed, the usual action for that key is performed. If your 7535 is operating with the Psion Teklogix ANSI emulation application, the hand-held transmits the escape sequence associated with the function immediately after the bar code data.

Strip Trailing

The value entered in this parameter determines the number of characters that will be removed from the end of the bar code before the suffix character is added.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 95

Chapter 5: Configuration

EAN 8

5.5.3.4

EAN 8

Figure 5.22 EAN 8 Settings

Include Chk

If this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data.

Addendum

Important: Before “Addendum” can take effect, the “Short Code” parameter in the Options menu (see page 87) must be enabled (

√

).

Refer to “Addendum” on page 94.

Size/Chars

See “Size/Chars” beginning on page 95.

96 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

5.5.3.5

UPC And EAN Settings

Chapter 5: Configuration

UPC And EAN Settings

Figure 5.23 UPC And EAN Settings

Supplementals

Enabling (

√

) this parameter allows supplementary data to be decoded.

Size/Char

Refer to page 91 for details.

5.5.3.6

UPC A Settings

Figure 5.24 UPC A Settings

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 97

Chapter 5: Configuration

UPC E Settings

Inc Num Sys

If this parameter is enabled (

√

), the number system digit is included with the decoded bar code data.

Include Chk

If this parameter is enabled (

√

), the check digit will be included with the decoded bar code data.

Addendum

Important: Before “Addendum” can take effect, the “Short Code” parameter in the Options menu (see page 87) must be enabled (

√

).

Refer to “Addendum” on page 94.

Size/Chars

Refer to page 95 for details.

5.5.3.7

UPC E Settings

Figure 5.25 UPC E Settings

Exp to UPC A

Enabling (

√

) this parameter results in a non-standard decoding that returns 12 digits from the 6 digit UPC E bar code.

98 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 5: Configuration

Codabar Size And Characters

Inc Num Sys

If this parameter is enabled (

√

), the number system digit is included with the decoded bar code data.

Include Chk

When enabled (

√

), the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data.

Addendum

Important: Before “Addendum” can take effect, the “Short Code” parameter in the Options menu (see page 87) must be enabled (

√

).

Refer to “Addendum” on page 94.

Size/Chars

Refer to page 95 for details.

5.5.3.8

Codabar Size And Characters

Size/Char

Refer to page 91 for details.

5.5.3.9

Code 93 Size And Characters

Size/Char

Refer to page 91 for details.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 99

Chapter 5: Configuration

Code 11

5.5.3.10

Code 11

Figure 5.26 Code 11 Settings

Include Chk

If “Include Chk” is enabled (

√

), the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data.

1 Chk Digit

If this parameter is enabled (

√

), it is assumed that the last digit is a check digit.

2 Chk Digits

If this parameter is enabled (

√

), it is assumed that the last two digits are check digits.

Size/Chars

Refer to page 91 for details.

100 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

5.5.3.11

I 2 of 5 Settings

Chapter 5: Configuration

I 2 of 5 Settings

Figure 5.27 I 2 of 5 Settings

Mod 10 Chk

If this parameter is enabled (

√

), the Mod 10 check digit is calculated. This calculation is the same as the Code 39 Mod 10 check digit.

ITF Chk

If this parameter is enabled (

√

), the ITF-14/16 Mod10 check digit is calculated.

Include Chk

If this parameter is enabled (

√

), the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data.

Size/Chars

Refer to page 91 for details.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 101

Chapter 5: Configuration

MSI/PLESSY Settings

5.5.3.12

MSI/PLESSY Settings

Figure 5.28 MSI/PLESSY Settings

1 Chk Digit

If this parameter is enabled (

√

), it is assumed that the last digit is a check digit.

Include Chk

If this parameter is enabled (

√

), the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data.

Size/Chars

Refer to page 91 for details.

102 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

5.5.3.13

D 2 of 5 Settings

Chapter 5: Configuration

D 2 of 5 Settings

Figure 5.29 D 2 of 5 Settings

Mod 10 Chk

If this parameter is enabled (

√

), the Mod 10 check digit is calculated. This calculation is the same as the Code 39 Mod 10 check digit.

ITF Chk

If this parameter is enabled (

√

), the ITF-14/16 Mod10 check digit is calculated.

Include Chk

If this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data.

Size/Chars

Refer to page 91 for details.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 103

Chapter 5: Configuration

IATA 2 of 5 Settings

5.5.3.14

IATA 2 of 5 Settings

Figure 5.30 IATA 2 of 5 Settings

Mod 10 Chk

If this parameter is enabled (

√

), the Mod 10 check digit is calculated.

ITF Chk

If this parameter is enabled (

√

), the ITF-14/16 Mod10 check digit is calculated.

Include Chk

If this parameter is enabled (

√

), the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data.

Size/Chars

Refer to page 91 for details.

5.5.3.15

Postal: Australian

Size/Chars

Refer to page 91 for details.

104 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

5.5.3.16

Postal: Japanese

Size/Chars

Refer to page 91 for details.

5.5.3.17

Postal: Korean

Size/Chars

Refer to page 91 for details.

5.5.3.18

Postal: PlaNET

Size/Chars

Refer to page 91 for details.

5.5.3.19

Postal: PostNET

Size/Chars

Refer to page 91 for details.

5.5.3.20

Postal: Royal Mail

Size/Chars

Refer to page 91 for details.

Chapter 5: Configuration

Postal: Japanese

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 105

Chapter 5: Configuration

DataMatrix (2D)

5.5.3.21

DataMatrix (2D)

Figure 5.31 DataMatrix (2D)

Inverse Video

If enabled (

√

), this parameter allows symbols that contain light cells on a dark background to be decoded.

Rectangular Symbols

When enabled (

√

), this parameter allows rectangular DataMatrix symbols to be decoded.

Small Symbols

If enabled (

√

), DataMatrix symbols of small physical size can be successfully decoded.

Size/Chars

Refer to page 91 for details.

5.5.3.22

Maxicode (2D)

Size/Chars

Refer to page 91 for details.

5.5.3.23

PDF-417 (2D)

Size/Chars

Refer to page 91 for details.

106 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

5.5.3.24

Micro PDF-417 (2D)

Size/Chars

Refer to page 91 for details.

5.5.3.25

QR Code (2D)

Chapter 5: Configuration

Micro PDF-417 (2D)

Figure 5.32 QR Code Settings

Inverse Video

If enabled (

√

), this parameter allows symbols that contain light cells on a dark background to be decoded.

Size/Chars

Refer to page 91 for details.

5.5.3.26

RSS Code (2D)

Size/Chars

Refer to page 91 for details.

5.5.3.27

Aztec

Size/Chars

Refer to page 91 for details.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 107

T

EKTERM

A

PPLICATION

6.1 The Tekterm Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

6.2 Additional Keyboard Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

6.2.1 Function Keys And Softkey Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

6.2.1.1 Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113

6.2.1.2 Softkey Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114

6.2.2 Macro Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

6.3 Keyboard Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

6.3.1 View Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

6.3.1.1 Changing Font Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116

6.3.1.2 Panning The Screen Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116

6.3.1.3 Exiting View Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117

6.3.2 Menu Mode And Switching Between Applications . . . . . . . . . . 118

6.3.2.1 Using The Task Manager To Switch Between Applications . .118

6.4 The Tekterm Status Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

6.5 TESS Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

6.5.1 Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

6.5.5.1 TESS Edit Modes And Cursor Movement . . . . . . . . . . .122

6.5.5.2 <DEL> Key Behaviour In TESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123

6.5.5.3 <BKSP> Key Behaviour In TESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124

6.5.2 Working With Multiple Sessions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

6.5.3 The Field Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

6.5.4 IBM 5250 Emulation Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

6.5.5 Data Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

6.5.6 TESS Status Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

6.5.7 Lock Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

6.5.8 Control Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

6.5.9 Resetting A TESS Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

6.5.10 The Local Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

6.5.11 Selecting Another Host Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

6.5.12 Queuing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

6.6 ANSI Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 109

6.6.1 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128

6.6.2 Sending Data To The Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129

6.6.3 Psion Teklogix Keyboard And VT220 Equivalent Keys . . . . . . . .129

6.6.4 Block Mode (Local Editing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130

6.6.5 Working With Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131

6.6.5.1 Establishing A New Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

6.6.5.2 Listing Sessions And Moving To Other Sessions. . . . . . . 131

6.6.5.3 Closing A Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

6.6.5.4 Printing A Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

6.6.5.5 Smart Echo – Disabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

6.7 The Tekterm Startup Display Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132

6.8 Working With Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133

6.8.1 Using The Keyboard To Navigate Through Menus . . . . . . . . . .133

6.8.1.1 Sub-Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

6.8.1.2 Numeric Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

6.8.1.3 Y/N Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

6.8.1.4 Alpha Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

6.8.1.5 String Entry Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

6.8.2 Using The Touchscreen To Navigate Through Menus . . . . . . . . .137

6.8.2.1 Sub-Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

6.8.2.2 Numeric Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

6.8.2.3 Y/N Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

6.8.2.4 Alpha Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

6.8.2.5 String Entry Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

6.8.3 Saving Changes To Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138

6.8.4 Retrieving Default Parameter Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139

6.9 Resetting The 7535 Hand-Held Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139

6.10 The Parameters Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139

6.10.1 Security Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140

6.11 Display Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140

6.12 More Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141

6.13 Radio Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142

6.14 System Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145

6.14.1 Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145

6.14.1.1 Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

6.14.1.2 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

6.14.1.3 Softkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

6.14.1.4 Cntrl Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

110 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

6.14.2 Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

6.14.3 Power Mgmt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

6.14.4 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

6.14.4.1 Default Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151

6.14.4.2 User Level Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152

6.14.4.3 Sup. Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152

6.15 Scanner Control Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

6.16 View Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

6.16.1 Split Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

6.16.1.1 Splitting And Displaying Screens. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155

6.16.1.2 Moving Between Split Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156

6.16.1.3 Toggling Between Full & Split Screens . . . . . . . . . . .156

6.16.1.4 Using The Asterisk As A Wild Card . . . . . . . . . . . . .157

6.16.2 Custom Characters (Unicode™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

6.16.2.1 Creating A Unicode™ Character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157

6.16.2.2 Displaying The Unicode™ Pop-up Window . . . . . . . . .158

6.17 Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

6.17.1 ANSI Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

6.17.1.1 Host Conn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162

6.17.1.2 Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163

6.17.1.3 Xmit Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166

6.17.1.4 Kbd Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170

6.17.1.5 Edit Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173

6.17.1.6 Serial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174

6.17.1.7 Host Char Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174

6.17.1.8 Anchor View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175

6.17.2 TESS Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

6.17.2.1 Host Conn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177

6.17.2.2 Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178

6.17.2.3 Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180

6.17.2.4 Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182

6.17.2.5 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183

6.17.2.6 Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186

6.17.2.7 Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188

6.17.2.8 Anchor View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190

6.18 Ports– Tether And Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 111

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

6.18.1 Tether And Console Port Peripheral Options . . . . . . . . . . . . .191

6.18.2 Tether And Console Port Parameter Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . .192

6.18.3 Tether And Console Port Scan-See Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . .195

6.18.3.1 Scan-See Sub-Menu – Mapping The Viewport . . . . . . . 195

6.18.3.2 Scan-See Keyboard Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200

6.19 Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201

6.19.1 Network Ctrl Panel Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201

6.19.1.1 NETWLAN – Configuring The Radio . . . . . . . . . . . 202

6.19.2 802.IQ v2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202

112 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

The Tekterm Application

6.1 The Tekterm Application

Tekterm is a powerful emulation application ideally suited for real time data transaction applications associated with mainframes and servers. The 7535 includes unique features that support Tekterm – a Psion Teklogix application that has the ability to maintain multiple simultaneous sessions with a variety of host computers.

6.2 Additional Keyboard Functions

In addition to the standard keyboard functions (see “The Keyboard” on page 37),

Tekterm supports additional keys – function keys, softkeys and macro keys – that are unique to this application.

6.2.1 Function Keys And Softkey Function Keys

6.2.1.1 Function Keys

The 7535 is equipped with a series of function key. The function of each of these keys is defined in the application software. Depending on the type of keyboard your

7535 has – 58-key or 36-key – the number and location of the function keys on the keyboard varies slightly.

58-Key Keyboard Function Keys

The 58-key keyboard is equipped with thirty function keys. Function keys <F1> to

<F6> are located across the top of the keyboard and are directly accessible – a key combination is not required. Function keys <F7> to <F30> are colour coded in blue print above the alpha keys and are accessed using a key combination – <BLUE> followed by the appropriate alpha key.

To access function keys <F7> to <F30>:

• Press the <BLUE> key followed by the alpha key to which the function key you want to use is mapped. For example:

To access function key <F7>, press <BLUE> <C>.

To access function key <F8>, press <BLUE> <D>, and so on.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 113

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

Softkey Function Keys

36-Key Keyboard Function Keys

The 36-key keyboard is equipped with twenty function keys. Function keys

<F1> to <F4> across the top of the keyboard and <F5> to <F10> at the bottom of the keyboard are directly accessible – a key combination is not required.

Function keys <F11> to <F20> are colour coded in orange print above function keys <F1> to <F10>.

To access function keys <F11> to <F20>:

• Press the <ORANGE> key followed by the appropriate function key.

For example:

To access function key <F11>, press the <ORANGE> key followed by <F1>.

To access function key <F12>, press <ORANGE> followed by <F2>, and so on.

6.2.1.2 Softkey Function Keys

To speed the process of moving through menus and changing parameters, function keys <F1> to <F5> have been programmed to perform specific actions in the

Tekterm menus. Table 6.1 describes these function keys.

These softkeys can be reprogrammed to perform different functions within TESS and ANSI applications.

Important: Keep in mind that you can press function keys <F1> to <F5> to execute these functions. If your 7535 is equipped with a touchscreen, you can tap the stylus on the appropriate softkey label, providing that the labels are visible at the bottom of the 7535 screen. See “Softkeys” on page 149 if they are not visible.

Function Key

<F1>

<F2>

<F3>

<F4>

<F5>

Softkey Function

NEXT – Displays the next sub-menu

PREV – Displays the previous menu.

DEFLT – Restores parameters to default settings – even after pressing <F4> to save the changes.

SAVE – Saves a change to a parameter value.

LITRL – LITERL – Literal mode allows special characters to be entered in a string parameter such as macro key strings.

Table 6.1 Softkeys

114 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

Macro Keys

Note: The SAVE onscreen label only appears when a parameter value has been changed and has not yet been saved.

6.2.2 Macro Keys

7535 hand-helds are equipped with a series of macro keys that can be programmed to replace frequently used keystrokes, along with the function of executable keys like the <ENTER> key, the <BKSP> key, any function key and arrow key, and so on.

58-Key Keyboard Macro Keys

7535s with 58-key keyboards have twelve macro keys – <M1> to <M12>. These keys are colour coded in orange print above alpha keys <O> to <Z>.

To access a macro key:

• Press the <ORANGE> key followed by the appropriate alpha key from

O to Z. For example:

To access macro key <M1>, press <ORANGE> <O>.

To access macro key <M2>, press <ORANGE> <P>, and so on.

Note: To learn how to program macro keys, refer to "Macros" beginning on page 145.

36-Key Keyboard Macro Keys

36-key keyboards are equipped with six macro keys – <M1> to <M6>. Macro keys

<M1> to <M2> are directly accessible in the bottom row of the keyboard – a key combination is not required.

Macro keys <M3> and <M4> are colour coded in orange print above macro keys

<M1> and <M2>.

• To access <M3>, press the <ORANGE> key followed by <M1>

• To access <M4>, press <ORANGE> <M2>.

Macro keys <M5> to <M6> are colour coded in blue print above macro keys <M1> and <M2>.

• To access <M5>, press the <BLUE> key followed by <M1>.

• To access <M6>, press <BLUE> <M2>.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 115

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

Keyboard Modes

6.3 Keyboard Modes

6.3.1 View Mode

Placing the 7535 keyboard in View mode allows you to choose another screen font and to pan the contents of the screen.

To place the computer keyboard in View mode:

• Press <CTRL> <ALT> <V>.

When the hand-held is in View mode, the onscreen message – View – is displayed in the status area at the bottom of the screen.

Keep in mind that this is a toggle key combination – pressing <CTRL> <ALT> <V> a second time turns View mode off.

6.3.1.1 Changing Font Sizes

To cycle through the available fonts (with the unit in View mode):

• Press the <F> key.

Each time you press the <F> key, the display font on the screen changes. Once you’ve displayed the appropriate font:

• Press <CTRL> <ALT> <V> to exit View mode.

6.3.1.2 Panning The Screen Contents

If the content of a screen is too large to fit in the margins of the 7535 display, the contents can be panned or shifted to bring the information outside the margins into view. Normally, the Arrow keys move the cursor around the screen in the direction of the arrow pressed. However, if the 7535 is operating in View mode, the <LEFT>,

<RIGHT>, <UP> and <DOWN> arrow keys pan the entire content of the screen rather than the cursor.

• Press <CTRL> <ALT> <V> to place the 7535 in View mode. An onscreen message – View – is displayed in the status area of the screen.

116 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

Exiting View Mode

Panning relies on the values set in the “Use Increment”, “X Increment” and

“Y Increment” parameters to determine the number of columns (spaces) and rows

(lines) the screen contents shift.

• In the “More Parameters” menu, position the cursor on “View Manager” and press <F1>.

• First, enable the “Use Increment” parameter – set it to “Y”.

“X Increment” determines the number of columns (spaces) the screen pans when the <LEFT> or <RIGHT> arrow key is pressed in View mode.

“Y Increment” determines the number of rows (lines) the screen pans when the

<UP> or <DOWN> arrow key is pressed in View mode.

• Assign a value to the “X Increment” and “Y Increment” parameters.

To pan the screen contents:

• Press the <RIGHT>, <LEFT>, <UP> or <DOWN> arrow key.

Note: Pressing the <LEFT> arrow pans the screen to the right, pressing the

<RIGHT> arrow pans the screen to the left, and so on.

6.3.1.3 Exiting View Mode

To exit View mode and resume normal operation:

• Press <CTRL> <ALT> <V> again.

Note: You can press the <BLUE> key followed by the appropriate arrow key each time you want to pan the contents one increment at a time in the direction of the arrow key without placing the 7535 in View mode.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 117

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

Menu Mode And Switching Between Applications

6.3.2 Menu Mode And Switching Between Applications

When the keyboard is in Menu mode, the System Menu is displayed so that you can move between active applications. (More information about System Menu items is provided in

Chapter 4, beginning on page 65.)

To place the 7535 in Menu mode:

• Press <BLUE> <0> (zero).

Figure 6.1 System Menu

6.3.2.1 Using The Task Manager To Switch Between Applications

Note: If you have a touchscreen, you can tap on Task Manager items to switch between applications, run a new application or end a task. To navigate using the keyboard, follow the description outlined below.

To display the Task Manager screen:

• Use the arrow keys to highlight Task Manager , and press <ENTER>, or

118 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

The Tekterm Status Area

• Just type the underlined alpha character – in this case, the letter ‘t’.

Figure 6.2 Task Manager Screen

Note: A shortcut – to bypass the System Menu and go directly to the

‘Task Manager’ screen, press <ALT> <ESC>.

To switch between applications:

• Highlight the application you want to work with, and press <ENTER>.

You can also use this screen to Run (start) another application not listed in the

‘Task Manager’ screen, or you can choose End Task to close an application.

6.4 The Tekterm Status Area

Tekterm provides a status area just above the softkey labels. The status area indicates the operating condition of the hand-held. Table 6.2 outlines the options displayed in the status area.

Status Area Indicators

Application

The active application is displayed in the status area – for example, Tekterm .

Security Level

Within Tekterm

The security level assigned within the Tekterm application is displayed in the status area. One of the following is displayed – User, Supervisor or Teklogix .

View Mode

When <CTRL><ALT><V> is typed to place the 7535 in View mode, this information is displayed in the status area.

Table 6.2 Status Area

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 119

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

TESS Emulation

6.5 TESS Emulation

TESS (Teklogix Screen Subsystem) is the normal operating mode of Psion Teklogix computers. Teklogix protocol emulation software resident on network controllers or a Psion Teklogix Software Development Kit (SDK) and installed in the host converts host screens to TESS commands. The 9150 Access Point is also equipped with protocol emulation software.

Note: If the message “RESET: Press Enter” flashes at the bottom of the TESS screen when you turn on the 7535, press the <ENTER> key once.

6.5.1 Configuration

Note: Each TESS session must have a unique name assigned to it. The title you assign will be displayed in the Display Menu.

The process of renaming an existing TESS session and adding a new session is described in the section titled, “Applications” on page 160.

A unique number must be assigned in the “Terminal #” parameter for each TESS session. Refer to “Terminal #” in the section titled “TESS Settings” on page 176 for details.

6.5.2 Working With Multiple Sessions

To display another session in TESS:

• Go to the startup ‘Display Menu’. If you are in a TESS session, press

<CTRL><ALT><0> to go to the ‘Display Menu’.

• Type the letter corresponding to the application you want to launch.

For example, suppose the sessions are listed in the “Display Menu” as

‘ D TESS1 ’ and ‘ E TESS2 ’. To launch the session named TESS2 , type the letter e.

6.5.3 The Field Types

Fixed Field – displays information that cannot be changed from the keyboard.

Entry Field – allows the operator to enter data. This type of field is usually shown as: “........”

Match Field – the host computer loads data in the format of the expected entry. If the entered data does not match the expected format, the unit emits a long beep.

120 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

IBM 5250 Emulation Keys

Auto-tab Field – automatically moves the cursor to the next field when the current field is filled.

Bar code only Field – is filled with data from a bar code reader. Keyboard entries are not accepted in this type of field.

Serial I/O Field – is filled with data coming from a serial port. Keyboard input is not accepted in this type of field.

6.5.4 IBM 5250 Emulation Keys

The following keys allow the Psion Teklogix computer to better emulate the functions of a true IBM 5250 terminal.

Note: These keys are active at all times in TESS applications.

Key Function

Field Advance or

Tab

Field Backspace

Field Exit

Key Sequence

<BLUE> <O>

(PgDn key)

<BLUE> <I>

(PgUp key)

<BLUE> <P>

(End key)

Cursor Movement

Cursor moves to the first position in the next input field. If already in the last field, the cursor moves to the first input field on the screen.

Cursor moves to the beginning of the current field. If already in the first position, the cursor moves to beginning of the previous field.

Current field is cleared from the cursor position to the end of the field, and the cursor moves to the next input field.

Home

<BLUE> <N>

(Home key)

Cursor moves to the first input field on the screen.

6.5.5 Data Entry

The 7535 accepts data until the operator presses a key that sends a transmission to the host computer. The following actions cause the 7535 to transmit:

• Pressing a function key or the <ENTER> key (which is considered to be

<F0>) causes the 7535 to transmit.

• Completing data entry into a “transmit on entry” field also causes the

7535 to transmit.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 121

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

TESS Edit Modes And Cursor Movement

There are several ways to configure the 7535 hand-held to complete a data field:

• Pressing <ENTER> after entering data.

• Pressing a function key after entering data.

• Pressing an arrow key after entering data.

• Filling an auto-tab field.

6.5.5.1 TESS Edit Modes And Cursor Movement

The TESS editing modes and cursor movements in each type of mode are described in the table below.

Field mode

Fcursor mode

Insert mode

Replace mode

Press < CTRL > f to enter field mode. In this mode, once data entry into a field has been completed, the entry cannot be changed without retyping the entire field.

In field mode, the <RIGHT> and <LEFT> arrow keys do not perform any functions. Pressing the <UP> or <DOWN> arrow key completes the entry field and then, moves the cursor to the previous or next field.

Press < CTRL > u to enter fcursor mode. In this mode, once data entry into a field has been completed, the entry cannot be changed without retyping the entire field.

In fcursor mode, the <UP>, <DOWN>, <LEFT> and <RIGHT> arrow keys move the cursor between fields.

Press <CTRL > i to enter insert mode. In this mode, data can be entered between two characters that have been previously entered.

In insert mode, the <RIGHT> and <LEFT> arrow keys move the cursor right and left within a field. The <UP> and <DOWN> arrow keys complete the entry field and move the cursor to the previous or next field.

Press <CTRL > r to enter replace mode. In this mode, data can be entered over previously entered characters.

In replace mode, the <RIGHT> and <LEFT> arrow keys move the cursor to the right and left within a field. The <UP> and <DOWN> arrow keys complete the entry field and move the cursor to the previous or next field.

Note: When the “Enter on Arr” parameter is disabled (set to “N”), the <UP> and <DOWN> arrow keys do not complete an entry field. Refer to page 188 for details about this parameter.

122 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

<DEL> Key Behaviour In TESS

6.5.5.2 <DEL> Key Behaviour In TESS

Field mode

Replace mode

Insert mode

Fcursor mode

• In a left justified field, the <DEL> key erases all characters in the field and places the cursor in the left most position of that field.

• In a right justified field, the <DEL> key erases all characters in the field and places the cursor in the right most position of that field.

• If the <DEL> key is used to clear data in a field that has been pre-filled by the host application, the field is flagged as modified and the updated information is sent to the host in the next response message.

• In both left and right justified fields, the <DEL> key erases characters beginning from the current cursor position to the end of the field. The cursor remains in the same position in the field.

• If the <DEL> key is pressed while cursor is in the right most position in the field, the 7535 emits a keyboard error beep.

• If the <DEL> key is used to clear data in a field that has been pre-filled by the host application, the field is flagged as modified and the updated information is sent to the host in the next response message.

• In both left and right justified fields, the <DEL> key erases the characters from one character position to right of the cursor to the end of the field.

• If the <DEL> key is pressed while the cursor is in the right most position in the field, the 7535 emits a keyboard error beep.

• If the <DEL> key is used to clear data in a field that has been pre-filled by the host application, the field is flagged as modified and the updated information is sent to the host in the next response message.

• Refer to “Field Mode” at the beginning of this table. The <DEL> key operates in the same manner in “Fcursor mode” as it does in

“Field mode”.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 123

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

<BKSP> Key Behaviour In TESS

6.5.5.3 <BKSP> Key Behaviour In TESS

Field mode

Replace mode

• In a left justified field, the <BKSP> key erases the character directly to the left of the cursor and then moves the cursor one position to the left. When the last character in the field is deleted, the field displays the value that it contained before it was modified, and the field is opened.

• In a right justified field, the <BKSP> key erases the character on which the cursor is positioned and shifts the remaining characters to the right by one position. When the last character in the field is deleted, the field displays the value that it contained before it was modified, and the field is opened.

• If the <BKSP> key is pressed when the field is empty, the 7535 emits a keyboard error beep.

• The <BKSP> key does not delete data pre-filled by the host application.

• If the <BKSP> key is pressed in a field that has not been modified, the

7535 emits a keyboard error beep.

• If data is entered into a field and is then deleted before the field is completed, the field remains unmodified when the cursor leaves the field or when the screen is transmitted.

• In a left justified field, the <BKSP> key erases the character on which the cursor is positioned unless it is one position to the right of the last character in the string; in this case, the <BKSP> key erases the character to the left of the cursor.

• In a right justified field, the <BKSP> key erases the character on which the cursor is positioned. The remaining characters are then shifted to the left of the cursor, and the cursor is shifted to the right by one position.

• If the <BKSP> key is pressed while the cursor is in the right-most character position of the field, the cursor does not shift to the left when that character is erased; it remains in the right most position in the field.

• When the last character in a field is erased, the field remains empty – that is, any pre-filled data is not displayed. Pressing the <BKSP> key in the empty field results in a keyboard error beep.

• The <BKSP> key can delete data pre-filled by the host application.

• If data is entered in a field and is then deleted before the field is completed, the field remains unmodified when the cursor leaves the field or when the screen is transmitted.

124 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

TESS Status Message

Insert mode

Fcursor mode

• In a left justified field, the <BKSP> function erases the character on which the cursor is positioned, unless it is at the right end of the character string; in this case, it erases the character to the left of the cursor.

When the last character in a field is erased, the field remains empty, and any further <BKSP> functions in the empty field result in a keyboard error beep.

• In a right justified field, the <BKSP> function erases the character that is to the right of the cursor and then shifts the data remaining to the right one position.

• If the <BKSP> key is pressed while the cursor is in the right-most character position of that field, the cursor does not shift to the left when that character is erased; it remains in the right-most position in the field.

• When the last character in a field is erased, the field remains empty – i.e. any pre-filled data is not displayed. Pressing the BKSP key in the empty field sounds a keyboard error beep.

• The <BKSP> key can delete data pre-filled by the host application.

• If data is entered into a field and then deleted before the field is completed, the field remains unmodified when the cursor leaves the field or when the screen is transmitted.

• Refer to “Field Mode” at the beginning of this table. The <BKSP> key operates in exactly the same manner in “Fcursor mode” as it does in “Field mode”.

6.5.6 TESS Status Message

• Press <CTRL> <S> to continuously display the status message in the lower left corner of the screen.

• Press <CTRL> <W> to make this message appear only when the 7535 locks. The message should look similar to the sample below:

V6.0 fld 0.6

“V6.0” is the TESS version number. “fld” indicates that TESS is currently in field mode. Insert and replace mode are represented as “ins” and “rep” respectively. The number “0.6” indicates the response time of the last transmission in seconds. Press

<CTRL> <T> to display the unit number instead of the TESS version number.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 125

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

Lock Messages

6.5.7 Lock Messages

When information is transmitted to the host computer, the keyboard locks to prevent further data entry until the 7535 receives a reply. A locked state is indicated by either “LOCK-B” (base) or “LOCK-H” (host) in the lower left corner of the display.

When the reply is received by the 7535, the lock message disappears and the keyboard can be used again.

6.5.8 Control Commands

A group of <CTRL> key commands can be used within TESS to dictate how the

7535 will operate under a variety of conditions.

• <CTRL> <P> – Reprints the last print page sent from the host. This key combination will not print anything if a print page from the host was not previously received at the 7535 hand-held.

• <CTRL> <S> – Displays the 7535 status continuously. Below is a sample status line as it might appear at the bottom of your screen:

Lock-B/Lock-H fld enh “application name”

• <CTRL> <W> – Displays the 7535 status when the unit is in “Lock B” or

“Lock H” mode. The status line would be similar to the sample above.

• <CTRL><T> – Displays the 7535 status with the terminal number instead of the name.

Lock-B/Lock-H rep “terminal nn”

• <CTRL> <H> – Displays a menu of available hosts.

6.5.9 Resetting A TESS Session

Resetting a TESS session requires that <CTRL> C be pressed three times within a two second period to generate the “RESET – User request” message.

• Press and hold down the <CTRL> key, and press the <C> key three times

within a two second period.

• Press <ENTER>.

This procedure restarts the TESS session without affecting the rest of the 7535.

126 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

The Local Menu

6.5.10 The Local Menu

The host can store local procedures in the 7535 for use when the unit is off-line.

A menu of these procedures appears whenever <CTRL> <L> is pressed

(see Figure 6.3).

• Press the function key corresponding to the procedure you want to perform.

Local procedures will not function when the “Lcl Process” and “Queuing” parameters are disabled (see “Lcl Process – Save on Reset” on page 183 and “Queuing” on page 183).

Although using local procedures eliminates the advantages of an on-line 7535, it allows work to continue when the host is unavailable. The “LOCK-B/H” messages are replaced with “NEXT-B/H” in this mode.

LOCAL MENU

F1 -

F2 -

F3 -

F4 -

F5 -

F6 -

F7 -

F8 -

F9 - Select Host

Figure 6.3 Local Menu

6.5.11 Selecting Another Host Computer

• Press <CTRL> <H> or <F9> from the local menu to display a menu of available hosts.

This menu appears only when more than one host is available.

Select Host: ......

F1 - Host 1 F2 - Host 2

Figure 6.4 Select Host Screen

Note: This feature will not function when the “Lcl Process” and “Queuing” parameters are disabled (see “Lcl Process – Save on Reset” on page 183 and “Queuing” on page 183).

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 127

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

Queuing Mode

6.5.12 Queuing Mode

In some applications, queuing mode can decrease the computer lock time. In queuing mode, the host computer may send several pages to a 7535 without waiting for a response. These pages are stored in a queue within the 7535 hand-held. The operator completes the entries on the first page and then, presses a function key.

The 7535 simultaneously transmits to the host and displays the next page in the queue. The computer does not lock, allowing the operator to enter data on the next page immediately. This continues as long as there are pages in the queue.

Queuing mode is used for repetitive tasks, and the queued screens look identical.

The 7535 displays a “Next” message indicating that a new page is on the display.

“Next” messages also contain information about radio communications: “NEXT-B” indicates that the 7535 has data to transmit to the base station. “NEXT-H” indicates that the base station has acknowledged a transmission. Unlike lock messages, “Next” messages do not lock the keyboard. Keying is allowed while

“Next” messages are displayed.

While queuing mode may improve apparent response time, it can present difficulties to hosts that are operating in real time. It should only be used after careful consideration of the host environment. The 7535 must be configured for queuing mode (see the “Queuing” parameter on page 183). Additional information on queuing can be found in the TESS (Teklogix Screen Subsystem) Manual.

6.6 ANSI Emulation

The Psion Teklogix 7535 in ANSI mode operates like most other ANSI terminals.

This means software that supports ANSI terminals requires little or no changes.

6.6.1 Configuration

To configure the 7535 for ANSI mode, the “Name” and “Type” of session – in this case, ANSI – must be specified in the Applications menu. This menu is described in the section titled, “Applications” on page 160.

Next, a unique number must be assigned using the “Terminal #” parameter. This number should be unique across the entire system – that is, each 7535 and each application session in each 7535 across your system must have a unique number assigned. This parameter is described in the section titled “ANSI Settings” on page 161.

Once the 7535 is configured, an ANSI operation can be selected from the startup

“Display Menu”.

128 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

Sending Data To The Host

6.6.2 Sending Data To The Host

7535 hand-helds running ANSI sessions transmit characters to the host as soon as they are typed. The 7535 provides parameters that determine when the computer transmits characters to the host.

The 7535 can be configured to transmit after a number of characters are typed in (the “Xmit Count” parameter) or after some time has elapsed (the “Xmit Wait” parameter), or both. This reduces overhead on the radio link and improves response time. See page 167 for more information about these parameters.

You can also determine whether the 7535 transmits immediately after the

<ENTER> key, an arrow key, or a function key is pressed.

The 7535 computer also responds immediately to the device attribute requests

“CSIc”, “CSI0c” and “ESCZ”.

Note: For a more detailed description of the parameter settings for ANSI, refer to “ANSI Settings” on page 161.

6.6.3 Psion Teklogix Keyboard And VT220 Equivalent Keys

The Psion Teklogix keyboard differs from most ANSI terminals. Table 6.3 maps the equivalent VT220 keys.

Psion Teklogix Key

<UP> arrow

<DOWN> arrow

<RIGHT> arrow

<LEFT> arrow

<F1>-<F4>

<F5>

<F6>-<F10>

<F11>

<F12>

<F13>

<F14>

<F15>

<F16>

<F17>-<F20>

Equivalent VT220 Key

Up arrow

Down arrow

Right arrow

Left arrow

PF1-PF4

None

F6-F10

F11 (ESC)

F12 (BS)

F13 (LF)

F14

Help

Do

F17-F20

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 129

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

Block Mode (Local Editing)

Psion Teklogix Key

<F21>

<F22>

<F23>

Equivalent VT220 Key

Find

Insert Here

Remove

<F24>

<F25>

<F26>

<F27>-<F36>

Select

Previous Screen

Next Screen

None

Table 6.3 Psion Teklogix Keyboard And VT220 Equivalent Keys

6.6.4 Block Mode (Local Editing)

The Psion Teklogix 7535s support “block mode” (or Local Editing). Application programs must be specifically written to support this mode. For software that supports this mode, the keys shown in Table 6.4 have special meaning.

<ENTER>

Key Function

Starts transmission of data.

Function keys

Arrow keys

<SHIFT> <RIGHT> arrow

Start transmission of data.

Move cursor to the next unprotected position in the appropriate direction.

Moves the cursor to the next unprotected area.

<SHIFT> <LEFT> arrow

<DEL>

<CLR>

Moves the cursor to the previous unprotected area.

Deletes the character to the left of the cursor, and moves cursor one position to the left.

Erases the data in an area and moves the cursor to the first position in the area.

Table 6.4 Function Of Keys In Block Mode

130 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

Working With Sessions

6.6.5 Working With Sessions

Important: Use only lowercase letters when entering commands at the “TCP >” prompt.

6.6.5.1 Establishing A New Session

• Press <CTRL>, and type a lowercase a.

At the TCP> prompt:

• Type tel in lowercase letters followed by the Host Name or IP address.

• Press <ENTER>.

• Log in as usual to begin working with the new session.

6.6.5.2 Listing Sessions And Moving To Other Sessions

To list the current sessions:

• Press <CTRL>, and type a lowercase a.

At the TCP> prompt:

• Type sess in lowercase letters, and press <ENTER>.

To move to another session:

• At the TCP> prompt, type sess in lowercase letters followed by the session number to which you want to move.

e.g., Type sess 2 to move to session 2.

• Press <ENTER>.

6.6.5.3 Closing A Session

To close a session:

• Press <CTRL>, and type a lowercase a.

• At the TCP> prompt, type cl in lowercase letters followed by the session number you want to close.

e.g., Type cl 2 to close session 2.

• Press <ENTER>.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 131

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

Printing A Screen

6.6.5.4 Printing A Screen

To print each line of a screen with a CR/LF between each line:

• Press <CTRL>, and type p.

The screen will be printed using the port configured as “Print”.

6.6.5.5 Smart Echo – Disabling

In some circumstances – like entering a password – you many want to temporarily disable “smart echo”, disguising the characters you type with ‘.’ (periods).

• Press <CTRL> <ALT> <P>, and type a ‘.’ (period).

• Type the necessary information using the keyboard, and then press

<ENTER> to return to “smart echo mode.

6.7 The Tekterm Startup Display Menu

The values assigned to Tekterm parameters can be viewed and adjusted to optimize communication at the site in which a 7535 is operating. While some parameters are accessible through the “Parameter Manager”, others can be adjusted through the

Windows CE Control Panel . This section provides a description of all parameters and how to adjust them.

• Press <CTRL> <ALT> <0> (zero) to work with the ‘Display’ menu.

From this startup menu, you can launch the “Parameters” menu along with TESS and/or ANSI sessions.

01 Display Menu

A Parameters

B TESS

C ANSI

Note: Aside from the ‘Parameters’ menu, all other applications listed in the

‘Display Menu’ must be created in the ‘Applications’ menu. Refer to

“Applications” on page 160 for details.

To launch an application, either type the letter to the left of the application you want to use, or tap the stylus on the item.

132 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

Working With Menus

For example, to display the “Parameters” menu:

• Type the letter a, or

• Tap the stylus on the “Parameters” item.

Note: To return to the ‘Display Menu’, press <F2> – the ‘Previous’ key.

6.8 Working With Menus

The 7535 offers two ways to navigate menus and choose values – you can either use the keyboard or, if your unit is equipped with a touchscreen, you can select items by tapping a stylus on the screen.

There are four types of parameters: numeric, Y/N, alpha and string entry. Some menus have sub-menus attached to them and others utilize a Control Panel dialogue box to make adjustments.

Important: Depending on the method you use when working with menus, review either “Using The Keyboard To Navigate Through

Menus” on page 133 or “Using The Touchscreen To Navigate

Through Menus” on page 137.

6.8.1 Using The Keyboard To Navigate Through Menus

• Press the <UP> and <DOWN> arrow keys to move the cursor up and down the current menu.

The currently selected parameter name will be displayed in reverse video.

6.8.1.1 Sub-Menus

The “ » ” character appearing to the right of the menu item indicates that it has a sub-menu.

Displaying Sub-Menus

To display a sub-menu:

• Use the <UP> and <DOWN> arrow keys to position the cursor on the menu item with the sub-menu you want to display.

• Press <F1> – the “NEXT” menu function key.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 133

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

Numeric Parameters

Returning To The Previous Menu

• Press <F2> – the “PREV” function key, or

• Press <ESC>.

6.8.1.2 Numeric Parameters

Numeric parameters are displayed in reverse video. To increment or decrement a number:

• Press the <RIGHT> or <LEFT> arrow keys, or

• Type the desired number in the field. Negative values are entered by typing a “-” (minus) sign and then the number.

• Press <ENTER>.

Each numeric parameter has a preset range of numbers assigned to it – for example, a preset range of 1 through 10. If you attempt to enter a number which either exceeds 10 or falls below 1, the incorrect value will be rejected – the original value for this parameter, if any, will be displayed.

6.8.1.3 Y/N Parameters

Y/N parameters can only be enabled (Y) or disabled (N). To enable or disable a Y/N parameter:

• Press the <RIGHT> or <LEFT> arrow key once, or

• Type y to enable or n to disable the parameter.

Some Y/N parameters have sub-menus. For these parameters, a double right arrow ( » ) appears next to the “Y” or “N”.

6.8.1.4 Alpha Parameters

Alpha characters appear in reverse video in this type of parameter. The allowable values for alpha parameters consist of a predetermined set of acceptable letters or words. To cycle through the set:

• Press the <RIGHT> or <LEFT> arrow keys.

134 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

String Entry Parameters

6.8.1.5 String Entry Parameters

Important: For detailed information about using string entry fields to program macro keys, refer to “Macros” on page 145.

A sequence or string of characters can be entered in this type of parameter. When a string entry parameter contains data, it is displayed in reverse video. (Empty fields are not displayed in reverse video.) The methods that can be used to enter information in string entry parameters are described in this section.

In string entry parameters, the <UP> arrow, <DOWN> arrow, <ENTER> and

<BKSP> keys have the following functions:

• The <UP> and <DOWN> arrow keys move the cursor between entry fields in the direction of the arrow.

• <ENTER> completes the entry field.

• <BKSP> deletes the character to the left of the cursor.

• <DEL> (key combination <BLUE> <BKSP>) clears the entire field.

Choosing An ASCII Character With The Arrow Keys

Important: Make sure the <CTRL> and <SHIFT> keys are turned off!

By pressing either the <RIGHT> or <LEFT> arrow key, you can cycle through a set of printable characters not directly accessible from the keyboard.

• Press the <RIGHT> arrow to display the next character in this sequence, and the <LEFT> arrow to display the previous one.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 135

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

String Entry Parameters

Adding Additional ASCII Characters

When you’ve chosen an ASCII character and want to add another one in the same field, the cursor must be moved to the right of the existing character. Normally, pressing the <RIGHT> arrow key moves the cursor to the right, but in a string entry field, pressing the <RIGHT> arrow key cycles through the available ASCII characters instead. If you’ve already chosen an ASCII character and want to add another one in the field, you need to take a few extra steps to move the cursor to the right.

To add another ASCII character in the string entry field, next to the one you’ve already chosen:

• Type a numeric character – for example, type the number 7.

• Next, press the <BKSP> key.

The cursor is now positioned to the right of the previously selected ASCII character.

• Press the <RIGHT> or <LEFT> arrow key to scroll through the ASCII characters, and select another character.

Entering Information In A String Entry Field

In addition to using the fixed set of ASCII values assigned to this type of parameter, you can also type text in a string entry field.

• Type the required text in the string entry field – including letters, numbers and symbols.

• Press <ENTER> to save the text.

Entering Unicode Values

Unicode is a trademark of The Unicode Consortium. To enter a Unicode™ value for one-time use:

• Press and hold down the <ALT> key while typing a four digit decimal value that represents the Unicode™ character you want to display.

• Release the <ALT> key.

136 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

Using The Touchscreen To Navigate Through Menus

Important: If you have a set of Unicode™ values that you use frequently, you may want to create and save them in a pop-up window so that you can access them whenever necessary. Refer to “Custom Characters (Unicode™)” on page 157 for details.

6.8.2 Using The Touchscreen To Navigate Through Menus

6.8.2.1 Sub-Menus

The “ » ” character appearing to the right of the menu item indicates that it has a sub-menu.

Displaying Sub-Menus

To display a sub-menu:

• Tap the stylus on the menu item with the sub-menu you want to display.

Returning To The Previous Menu

• If the softkey labels are visible at the bottom of the screen, tap the stylus on the “PREV” (previous) softkey label.

• If the softkey labels are not visible, you’ll have to press <F2> – the “PREV” function key.

6.8.2.2 Numeric Parameters

Numeric parameters are displayed in reverse video.

• To decrease the numeric value, tap the stylus on the left side of the number.

• To increase the numeric value, tap the stylus on the right side of the number.

Each numeric parameter has a preset range of numbers assigned to it – for example, a preset range of 1 through 10. If you attempt to enter a number which either exceeds 10 or falls below 1, the incorrect value will be rejected – the original value for this parameter, if any, will be displayed.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 137

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

Y/N Parameters

6.8.2.3 Y/N Parameters

Y/N parameters can only be enabled (Y) or disabled (N). To enable or disable a Y/N parameter:

• Tap the stylus on the Y/N value – the value will toggle between “Y” and “N”.

Some Y/N parameters have sub-menus. For these parameters, a double right arrow ( » ) appears next to the “Y” or “N”.

• Tap the stylus on the sub-menu arrow ( » ) to display the sub-menu.

6.8.2.4 Alpha Parameters

Alpha characters appear in reverse video in this type of parameter. The allowable values for this type of parameter consist of a predetermined set of acceptable letters or words. To cycle through the set:

• Tap the stylus on the alpha field to cycle through the options.

6.8.2.5 String Entry Parameters

You’ll need to use the keyboard to enter values in string entry fields. Refer to “String

Entry Parameters” on page 135 for details.

6.8.3 Saving Changes To Parameters

Whenever a parameter value is altered, the new value must be saved. To do this:

• Press <F4> – the “SAVE” key.

If you are using a touchscreen:

• Tap the stylus on the “SAVE” softkey label.

• If the softkey labels are not visible, you’ll have to press <F4> – the “SAVE” function key.

If a parameter value is changed and the menu exited before the change is saved, a dialogue box appears asking whether or not the operator wants to save the changes.

138 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

Retrieving Default Parameter Values

6.8.4 Retrieving Default Parameter Values

Important: When <F3> – the DEFAULT key – is pressed, all parameter values revert to the factory defaults, including those values that you’ve changed and saved.

• Press <F3> – the “DEFAULT” function key, or tap the stylus on the

“DEFAULT” softkey label – to reinstate the default parameter values.

• Press <F4> – the “SAVE” function key, or tap the stylus on the “SAVE” softkey label – to save the changes.

• Reset the 7535. See "Resetting The 7535 Hand-Held Computer" in the next section.

6.9 Resetting The 7535 Hand-Held Computer

Some parameter adjustments require that the 7535 be reset before the changes can take effect. To reset the 7535:

• Press and hold down the <BLUE> key and the <ENTER/ON> key simultaneously for a minimum of six seconds.

A reset results in a complete reboot of the unit. All RAM memory contents are lost.

The contents of the flash memory and memory card are preserved. When the 7535 is reset, the screen displays the Psion Teklogix and Microsoft® Windows® CE.net splash screen before displaying the startup desktop.

6.10 The Parameters Menu

• At the ‘Display’ menu, type a to display the Parameters menu.

01 Parameters Range

More Parameters »

Security User see page 141 see page 140

Display » see page 140

The “Parameters” menu allows you to adjust the screen contrast and select a security level. With a Supervisory or Teklogix password, you can also access the parameters listed in the “More Parameters” sub-menu.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 139

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

Security Settings

6.10.1 Security Settings

In order to access the “More Parameters” sub-menus, the “Security” parameter must be set to either a Supervisor or a Teklogix level password. The default security level is User.

01 Parameters Range

More Parameters »

Security User see page 141 see text

Display » see text

• Position the cursor on “Security”, and press the <RIGHT> arrow key to display the Supervisor option.

• Press <ENTER>.

A Password screen is displayed.

Password

. . . . . .

• Type the supervisory level password – it is set at the factory to 123456.

• Press <ENTER>.

Changing A Password

Important: “Sup. Password” on page 152 describes how to change a supervisory level password and how to change “User” options.

6.11 Display Options

The ‘Display’ sub-menu is used to adjust your unit’s display properties.

• Press <F1> to access the ‘Display’ sub-menu.

02 Display Range

Backlight Ctrl Panel » see text

140 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

More Parameters

The Display Properties dialogue box is displayed where you can adjust the appearance, backlight and contrast of your 7535 display.

Figure 6.5 Display Properties

Important: ‘Display Properties’ dialogue box options are described in detail beginning on page 77.

6.12 More Parameters

The “More Parameters” sub-menus contain the Tekterm parameters and can only be accessed with the proper security password – either a Supervisory or a Teklogix password. (Refer to “Security Settings” on page 140 for details.)

Warning: Parameters should not be altered without a clear understanding of how they operate. Parameters that are incorrectly set can increase response time or cause communication difficulties. Generally, parameters are configured for each site during installation.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 141

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

Radio Parameters

• At the startup ‘Display’ menu, type ‘a’ to display the ‘Parameters’ menu.

01 Parameters Range

More Parameters »

Security Supervisor see page 141 see page 140

Display » see page 140

• To open the ‘More Parameters’ menu, press <F1>.

02 Parameters

Radio

System

»

»

Scanner Ctrl Panel »

View Manager »

Applications

Ports

Network

»

»

»

6.13 Radio Parameters

Important: Radio parameters should not be changed from their factory settings without a clear understanding of your system.

The 7535 is equipped with an Intel 802.11b radio.

• Press <F1> to display the ‘Radio’ sub-menu.

03

802.11

Radio

»

• Press <F1> again to access the ‘802.11’ sub-menu.

04 802.11 DS SS

802.IQ v1

CIS Data

N »

»

142 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

Radio Parameters

• Press <F1> to display ‘802.IQ v1’ parameters.

05 802.IQ v1

Auto Radio Addr Y

Radio Address

Initial RTT

Protocol Type

0

0

2457

Range

Y/N

1-3840

0-1000

1501-65535

802.IQ v1

When 802.IQ v1 is set to “Y”, the attached sub-menu of parameters is enabled.

Auto Radio Addr

If this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), a request is sent to the network controller to assign a radio address to the hand-held computer radio.

If “Auto Radio Addr” is set to “N”, the value entered in the “Radio Address” parameter is used. (Refer to "Radio Address" in this section for details about manually assigned radio addresses.)

Important: Ensure that all 7535s grouped in the system use the same addressing process – that is, if you choose to use automatic radio addressing, use this addressing process for all units operating in the same system. If you choose to assign radio addresses manually using the “Radio Address” parameter, use this process for all units in the same system.

Radio Address

The value entered in the “Radio address” parameter is used to identify the

7535 over the radio link. A unique value from 1 to 3840 must be assigned for each 7535 hand-held computer.

Initial RTT (Round Trip Time)

Round trip time is the elapsed time between a hand-held computer transmission and an access point acknowledgement. Each 7535 continuously adjusts the acceptable round trip time, calculating the average elapsed time over a number of transmissions. If an acknowledgement takes longer to receive than the average round trip time calculated, the computer will resend the transmission.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 143

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

Radio Parameters

Because 7535s cannot calculate an average round trip time without a number of transmissions, a starting point or “Initial Round Trip Time” is required. The computer uses the time assigned to the “Initial RTT” parameter as a starting value for round trip calculations. Once the 7535 begins transmitting and receiving data, this value will be adjusted to reflect the actual average round trip time between transmissions and acknowledgements.

Protocol Type

“Protocol Type” is used to identify the Ethernet packet frame type sent by the 7535.

The default value – 2457 – assigned to this parameter identifies the Teklogix 802.IQ protocol Ethernet packet frame types.

The “Protocol Type ID” should only be altered if the default value is already being used to specify another application Ethernet frame type.

Important: If you change the value assigned to “Protocol Type ID”, ensure that all 7535s and 9150s in your system use the same number.

CIS Data

CIS Data

Version 00.24

00:03:64:91:52:cd

This sub-menu displays Card Information Structure (CIS) data, including the version and the unit hardware address.

144 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

System Parameters

6.14 System Parameters

03 System

Keyboard

Audio

»

»

Pwr Mgmt Ctrl Panel »

Security »

6.14.1 Keyboard

04 Keyboard

Macros

Indicators

»

Y

Softkeys Y

Ctrl Panel »

6.14.1.1 Macros

A macro has 20 programmable characters (or “positions”). The macro keys can be programmed to replace frequently used keystrokes, along with the function of executable keys like <ENTER>, <DEL>, function keys and arrow keys. They may also be used to provide characters not normally accessed from the keyboard.

The methods used to create macros are described in this section.

Displaying The Macros Menu

Macros are programmed from within the “Macros” sub-menu.

• From the “Display Menu”, type the letter a to display the “Parameters” menu.

• In the “Parameters” menu, highlight “System”, and press <F1>.

02 Parameters

Radio

System

»

»

Scanner Ctrl Panel»

View Manager »

Applications

Ports

Network

»

»

»

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 145

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

Macros

• In the “System” sub-menu, position the cursor on “Keyboard”, and press <F1>.

03 System

Keyboard

Audio

»

»

Power Mgmt Ctrl Panel »

Security »

Range see text see text see text see text

• With the cursor resting on “Macros”, press <F1>.

04 Keyboard Range

Macros

Indicators

Softkeys

Ctrl Panel

»

Y

Y

» see text

Y/N

Y/N see text

.

05

M1

•

•

•

M12

Macros

Programming Macros

You can program up to 12 macro keys on a 58-key keyboard and 6 macro keys on a

36-key keyboard.

• Position the cursor in the macro field corresponding to the macro key to which you want to assign macros – M1 corresponds to macro key <M1>,

M2 corresponds to macro key <M2>, and so on.

Once the cursor is in a macro field, you have a number of options when creating a macro. You can type text and numbers, choose from a set of ASCII characters and program the function of special keys into a macro.

146 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

Macros

In macros, the <UP> arrow, <DOWN> arrow, <ENTER> and <DEL> keys have the following functions:

• Pressing the <UP> and <DOWN> arrow keys move the cursor between entry fields.

• Pressing the <ENTER> key once moves the cursor to the first position in the entry field; pressing <ENTER> a second time completes the entry field, exits the sub-menu and returns the cursor to the “parent” or previous menu.

• The <BKSP> key deletes the character to the left of the cursor.

• The <DEL> key – <BLUE> <BKSP> – clears the entire field. If the last character in a field is deleted, the previous contents, if any, reappear.

Entering Text In A String Entry Field

In addition to using the fixed set of ASCII values assigned to this type of parameter, you can also type text in a string entry field.

• Type the required text in the string entry field – including letters, numbers and symbols.

• Press <ENTER> to save the text.

Entering Unicode™ Values

Unicode is a trademark of The Unicode Consortium. To enter a Unicode™ value:

• Press and hold down the <ALT> key while typing a four digit decimal value that represents the Unicode™ character you want to display.

• Release the <ALT> key.

Choosing An ASCII Character

Important: Make sure the <CTRL>, <ALT> and <CAPS> keys are turned off!

By pressing either the <RIGHT> or <LEFT> arrow key, you can cycle through a set of printable characters. The sample below is a set of ASCII characters accessible from within a macro field: ? ’ , < > [ ] ^ _ ` { | } ~ =

• Press the <RIGHT> arrow to display the next character in this sequence, and the <LEFT> arrow to display the previous one.

Adding Additional ASCII Characters

When you’ve chosen an ASCII character and want to add another one in the same field, the cursor must be moved to the right of the existing character. Normally, pressing the <RIGHT> arrow key moves the cursor to the right, but in a string entry

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 147

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

Indicators field, pressing the <RIGHT> arrow key cycles through the available ASCII characters instead. If you’ve already chosen an ASCII character and want to add another one in the field, you need to take a few extra steps to move the cursor to the right.

To add another ASCII character in the string entry field, next to the one you’ve already chosen:

• Type a numeric character – for example, type the number 7.

• Next, press the <BKSP> key

The cursor is now positioned to the right of the previously selected ASCII character.

• Press the <RIGHT> or <LEFT> arrow key to scroll through the ASCII characters, and select another character.

Programming Special Keys Into Macros

Macros can contain the function of a subset of computer keys. The keys that can be programmed into macros include: <ENTER>, <BKSP> and <DEL> (<BLUE>-

<BKSP>), function keys and arrow keys. To program the function of a key:

• Position the cursor in the macro field corresponding to the macro key you want to program – for example, the field labelled M1 represents macro key

<M1>, and so on.

• Press <F5> – the Literal function key. (Alternatively, you can press

<CTRL> <ALT> and then, type the letter l (el) (l represents “literal”).

• Press the key you wish to add to the macro.

For example: To execute the function of the <ENTER> key in a macro, press <F5> <ENTER>.

6.14.1.2 Indicators

When the “Indicators” parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), onscreen indicators are displayed to indicate the operating condition of the 7535. Refer to “Onscreen

Indicators” on page 47 for a list of possible indicators.

148 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

Softkeys

6.14.1.3 Softkeys

Enabling (setting to “Y”) the “Softkeys” parameter displays softkey labels at the bottom of the screen to indicate the function of each softkey. To block the display of softkey labels, set this parameter to “N”.

Softkeys are function keys which are programmed to execute specific actions when pressed. Refer to Table 6.1 on page 114 for a list of softkey labels.

6.14.1.4 Cntrl Panel

This menu item displays the Keyboard Properties dialogue box in which you can adjust the repeat rate of the keys, the intensity of the keyboard backlight and the behaviour of the <BLUE> and <ORANGE> keys.

Figure 6.6 Keyboard Properties

Important: Refer to “Keyboard Properties” on page 80 for details about this dialogue box.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 149

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

Audio

6.14.2 Audio

04 Audio

Beep tone

Beep time

Error tone

Error time

Scan tone 1

Scan time 1

Scan tone 2

Scan time 2

Scan tone 3

Scan time 3

3000

250

1000

1000

1500

150

2000

150

2500

150

Range

800-3000

0-2000

800-3000

0-2000

800-3000

0-2000

800-3000

0-2000

800-3000

0-2000

Beep Tone And Beep Time

These parameters regulate the frequency and duration of beeps emitted in a TESS or

ANSI session when one of the following is received at the 7535: an advisory, a hey

you or a bell character. Tone is measured in hertz and time in milliseconds.

Error Tone And Error Time

These parameters determine the frequency and duration of each error tone. Tone is measured in hertz and time in milliseconds.

Scan Tone 1 And Scan Time 1

“Scan tone 1” and “Scan time 1” determine the frequency and duration of the first beep of a multiple beep. Tone is measured in hertz and time in milliseconds.

Scan Tone 2 And Scan Time 2

“Scan tone 2” and “Scan time 2” determine the frequency and duration of the second beep of a multiple beep. Tone is measured in hertz and time in milliseconds.

Scan Tone 3 And Scan Time 3

“Scan tone 3” and “Scan time 3” determine the frequency and duration of the third beep of a multiple beep. Tone is measured in hertz and time in milliseconds.

150 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

Power Mgmt

6.14.3 Power Mgmt

This menu item displays the Power Properties dialogue box that displays the battery capacity of the 7535 and allows you to manage battery use.

Figure 6.7 Power Properties Dialogue Box

Important: Refer to “Power Management Properties” on page 83 for details about this dialogue box.

6.14.4 Security

04 Security

Default mode

User

Sup. password

Range

User

»

Supervisor, Teklogix see text

###### see text

6.14.4.1 Default Mode

The value assigned to this parameter determines the operator’s level of access to

7535 parameters. The values include User, Supervisor and Teklogix. “Default mode” is set to User.

At User level, the operator is restricted to a small group of parameters. These are listed in the “User” sub-menu. Refer to “User Level Options” on page 152 for details. Choosing Supervisor allows access to all the parameters available in the

7535.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 151

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

User Level Options

The Teklogix level password is only available to Psion Teklogix personnel.

• Press the <LEFT> or <RIGHT> arrow key to select the appropriate security level – User, Supervisor or Teklogix.

6.14.4.2 User Level Options

05 User

Screen switch Y

View Mode

Font Chg

Y

Y

Range

Y/N

Y/N

Y/N

Important: Only Supervisor and Teklogix level passwords can change the

values of the User options.

Screen Switch

When set to “Y”, the operator can use the “Split screen” parameter to toggle between screens when multiple applications are running on the 7535. Refer to “Split

Screen” on page 155 for details about using this function.

Font Chg

When “Font Chg” is set to “Y”, operators at the User level can change the font size of their 7535s.

6.14.4.3 Sup. Password

Note: Only a Supervisor or Teklogix level password can change the Supervisor password.

The supervisory password is set at the factory to 123456. You should change the default password to better protect the 7535 settings. When you’ve changed the password, write down the new password and file it in a secure place. If the password is lost, the parameters can only be changed by Psion Teklogix personnel.

152 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

Scanner Control Panel

Your password can have up to six alphanumeric characters. To change your password:

• Position the cursor on “Sup. password” and type a new value in the string entry field.

• When you’ve completed the change, press <ENTER> and then, press <F4>

– the SAVE function key – to save your change.

Important: When you change your password, set all the 7535s to the same password.

6.15 Scanner Control Panel

This menu item displays a Scanner Properties dialogue box in which you can set up the particulars of your unit’s scanner performance, choose the bar codes which will be decoded, and so on.

Figure 6.8 Scanner Properties Dialogue Box

Important: Refer to "Scanner Properties" beginning on page 86 for details about setting up your scanner.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 153

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

View Manager

6.16 View Manager

View Manager

Display Shift

Block Cursor

Use Increment

X-increment

Y-increment

Split Screen

Custom Chars

Font Override N»

Default Colours »

5

»

»

Y

Y

N

5

Range

Y/N

Y/N

Y/N

1..40

1..12

see text see text see text see text

Display Shift

If this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), the display in application screens shifts so that there are no blank columns on the left-most side of the display.

Block Cursor

When this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), the cursor is presented as a flashing block. When “Block Cursor” is set to “N”, the cursor is presented as a flashing underline character.

Use increment

When “Use increment” is enabled (set to “Y”) and the cursor is moved off the display, the screen contents shift by the values specified in the “X-increment” and

“Y-increment” parameters.

X-increment

This parameter determines the number of spaces the screen shifts once the cursor moves out of view. The value assigned here doesn’t take effect until “Use

Increment” is set to “Y”.

Y-increment

This parameter determines the number of spaces the screen shifts once the cursor moves out of view. The value assigned here doesn’t take effect until “Use

Increment” is set to “Y”.

154 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

Split Screen

6.16.1 Split Screen

04 Split screen

Type

View IDs

2 Way |||

A

This parameter allows you to split the display view so that more than one application screen can be displayed at the same time. The split screen parameters,

“Type” and “View IDs”, are used to tailor the screen view for your needs.

Type And View IDs

The “Type” parameter determines how a screen will be split. The 7535 supports up to four application screens. The “View IDs” parameter determines which application screens will be displayed in each pane of the split screen. “Moving

Between Split Screens” on page 156 describes how to move the cursor from one split screen to the next.

6.16.1.1 Splitting And Displaying Screens

Before splitting the screen, you need to determine which applications should appear in each pane of the split screen. The available applications are listed in the main

“Display Menu”. Each application listed in the “Display Menu” is preceded by a letter – for example, Parameters is preceded by an A . This letter is used in the

“View IDs” string entry field to fix each pane of a split screen to a corresponding application.

If you need to display the startup “Display Menu”:

• Press <CTRL> <ALT><0>.

To split a screen:

• With the cursor on the “Type” parameter, use the <RIGHT> or <LEFT> arrow key to scroll through the types of split screens available.

The vertical and horizontal lines displayed at the “Type” parameter indicate how the screen will be split – for example, in the sample screen on page 157, the vertical lines indicate the screen will be vertically split into two segments. The screen can also be split horizontally 3 ways or 4 ways.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 155

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

Moving Between Split Screens

Once you’ve indicated how you want to split the screen in the “Type” parameter:

• Use the <DOWN> arrow key to move the cursor to the “View IDs” parameter.

• For each application you want to display, type the letter corresponding to the application.

For example, suppose you want to split the screen into two vertical segments with the Parameters menu in the left pane of the screen and a TESS session in the right pane. In the “Display Menu”, the letter A represents “ Parameters ” and B represents “ TESS ”. The “Type” and

“View ID” values would be represented as follows:

04 Split screen

Type

View IDs

2 Way |||

AB

• Press <ENTER>.

To display the split screen on the 7535:

• Press <CTRL> <DOWN> arrow.

6.16.1.2 Moving Between Split Screens

To move the cursor from one pane in a split screen to the next:

• Press <CTRL> <RIGHT> or <LEFT>. The cursor moves in order from the left-most pane to the right and from the top-most pane to the bottom.

6.16.1.3 Toggling Between Full & Split Screens

To toggle between a split and full screen format:

• Press <CTRL> <DOWN> arrow.

The application displayed when toggling from a split to a full screen format is determined by the cursor location in the split screen. For example, if the cursor is in the pane of a split screen in which the TESS application is displayed and

<CTRL> <DOWN> is pressed to display a full screen, the TESS application will be displayed in the full screen.

156 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

Using The Asterisk As A Wild Card

6.16.1.4 Using The Asterisk As A Wild Card

When a screen is split, the application displayed in each pane is fixed in the “View

IDs” parameter. Using an asterisk * in the “View IDs” parameter indicates that a particular pane in the split screen is not fixed to any particular application and can be changed as required.

For example, suppose you want to split the screen into two vertical segments with the left pane containing the “Parameters” menu and the right pane containing no fixed application. The “Type” and “View IDs” parameters would be completed as follows:

04 Split screen

Type

View IDs

2 Way |||

A*

To change the application displayed in the pane with no fixed application:

• If the cursor is not currently in the pane, press <CTRL> <RIGHT> or

<LEFT> arrow to move the cursor into the appropriate screen.

• Press <CTRL> <ALT><0> to display the startup “Display Menu”.

• Type the letter corresponding to the new application you want to display.

6.16.2 Custom Characters (Unicode™)

The “Custom Characters” parameter allows you to create Unicode™ characters not available directly from the keyboard, including accented characters. Unicode is a trademark of The Unicode Consortium. You can create up to 20 Unicode™ characters that will be stored in a pop-up menu accessible from any application.

6.16.2.1

Creating A Unicode™ Character

Note: You can create a Unicode™ character by pressing and holding down the <ALT> while typing the decimal value that represents the Unicode™ character you want to use. However, you will need to press <ALT> and retype the decimal value each time you want to use the special character.

The advantage to creating special characters using the “Custom Chars” parameters is that the characters you create in the customer characters table are saved in a pop-up window that is accessible from any application.

• In the Parameters menu, highlight “View Manager” and press <F1>.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 157

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

Displaying The Unicode™ Pop-up Window

• Highlight “Custom Chars”, and press <F1> to display the custom characters table.

04 Custom Chars

•

•

•

Font Small

U+

U+

0000

0000

• Position the cursor on the Fonts at the top of the table.

• Press the <LEFT> or <RIGHT> arrow keys until the character set you want to use is displayed.

You can create up to 20 Unicode™ characters in the custom characters table.

To create a Unicode™ value:

• Replace the 0000 value with a hex value that represents the Unicode™ character you want to use.

• Press the <DOWN> arrow key to accept the value and move the cursor to the next field.

When you have finished creating the Unicode™ characters you want to use:

• Press <F4> to save your changes.

• Reset the 7535 – press and hold down the <ENTER> and <BLUE> key simultaneously for a minimum of six seconds.

6.16.2.2 Displaying The Unicode™ Pop-up Window

The Unicode™ values you create are stored in a pop-up window that you can access from any application.

To display the pop-up window within any application:

• Press <CTRL> <ALT> <A>.

Note: Unicode™ characters that cannot be displayed on your screen with the font you are currently using are displayed as rectangles in the pop-up window. (See the sample menu on page 159.) However, the actual Unicode™ value you created will be sent to the host.

158 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

Displaying The Unicode™ Pop-up Window

Select item with arrow keys.

Press ENTER when done.

Press ESC to cancel.

• Use the <LEFT> or <RIGHT> arrow key to position the cursor on the

Unicode™ value you want to use, and press <ENTER>.

To close the pop-up menu when you’re done:

• Press the <ESC> key.

Font Override

04 Font Override

Font Code 0

... is font 18x32

Font Code 1

... is font 18x32

Font Code 2

... is font 10x26

Font Code 3

... is font 18x32

Font Code 4

... is font 8x20

This parameter is used to redefine the font to which 5 different font codes refer.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 159

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

Applications

Default Colours

04 Default Colours

Foreground

Background

Black

White

Range see text see text

Foreground And Background

This menu is used to select the foreground and background colours used within

Tekterm. If an unreadable combination is assigned – the foreground and background have the same value – the foreground colour will be inverted.

The allowable values are: Red , Green , Yellow , Blue , Magenta , Cyan , White and Black .

Note: The 7535 must be reset – press and hold down the <BLUE> and

<ENTER> keys for a minimum of six seconds – in order for the new colour assignments to take affect.

6.17 Applications

“TESS” and “ANSI” applications require unique names so that several different sessions of “TESS” and “ANSI” can operate simultaneously. 7535s can support up to 8 sessions at one time.

03 Applications

Type1 #1 ANSI

Title1 #1 parts

Settings 1 »

.

.

.

Type1 #8 None

Title1 #8

Settings 8 »

Range

None, ANSI,TESS see text

Important: These applications will become active only after the changes made in the Application screen are saved by pressing <F4> – the SAVE key.

160 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

ANSI Settings

Type And Title

Up to eight applications can be entered in this parameter. The “Type #” field indicates the type of session you will be running. The “Title #” parameter should be completed with a name that is meaningful to the operator.

• The available options for the “Type #” field are TESS, ANSI and None.

Use the <RIGHT> or <LEFT> arrow key to scroll through the options.

• The “Title #” field needs a name that is meaningful to the operator. In addition, “TESS” and “ANSI” applications require unique titles so that several different sessions of “TESS” and “ANSI” can operate simultaneously.

These titles will appear in startup “Display Menu”. Each session will have its own set of parameters.

• To display the “Settings” menu for your application, position the cursor on “Settings”, and press <F1> – the NEXT key.

Note: Before you can access the “Settings” menu, you must first complete the

“Name” and “Type” fields.

6.17.1 ANSI Settings

04 Ansi

Auto Term #

Terminal #

Host Conn

Screen

Xmit Modes

Kbd Modes

Edit Modes

Serial

Host Char Set

Anchor View

»

»

»

N»

N»

1

»

»

»

»

Range see text

1..1024

see text see text see text see text see text see text see text see text

Each session you create has its own “Settings” parameters. Additional ANSI information is documented in “ANSI Emulation” on page 128.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 161

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

Host Conn

Auto Term#

Note: Refer to “Group” on page 162 for additional instructions.

When this parameter is set to “Y”, a unique number is assigned for the current

ANSI session. If “Auto Term#” is set to “Y”, any value assigned to the “Terminal #” parameter is ignored.

Note: “Auto Term#” is available when 802.IQv2

is assigned to the “Host

Conn” parameter (page 162) or when 802.IQv1

is enabled in the Radio

Menu (see “802.IQ v1” on page 143).

Group

Auto Term#

Group 1

Range

1-5

When “Auto Term#” is set to “Y”, the ‘Group’ parameter is used to identify the

group or pool of numbers from which an auto-address is chosen.

Terminal #

For every application session you create, the “Terminal #” assigned must be nonzero and unique. This parameter defines the number for the ANSI session and uniquely identifies all transmissions to and from the 7535.

Other applications running in the 7535, such as a TESS session or another ANSI session must each have a different number. In addition, each Psion Teklogix 7535 using the radio link must have a unique number.

6.17.1.1 Host Conn

05 Host Conn

Conn Type

Settings

Telnet

»

Range

Telnet 9010t 802.IQv2

see text

Conn Type

For ANSI applications, this parameter allows you to choose one of the following types of connections: 802.IQv2, 9010t (TCP Direct) or Telnet. Keep in mind that choosing Telnet allows the 7535 to communicate directly with the host.

162 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

Screen

Settings

Note: The “Settings” sub-menu is not available when 802.IQv2

is selected as the “Conn Type”.

06

Host

Port

Settings

9999

Range see text

0-9999

Host

This parameter is used to assign a host IP address using the format ###.###.###.###

Port

“Port” specifies the 9010t or Telnet port number.

6.17.1.2 Screen

05 Screen

# of Pages

# of Rows

# of Cols

Default Font

80-col. Font

132-col. Font

4

24

80

16x30

16x30

16x30

Video

Label F1-F6

»

»

Colour override N »

Range

0..16

4..60

80 or 132 see text see text see text see text see text see text

# of Pages

This parameter defines how many pages are accessible to application programs. The

ANSI control functions – Next Page (NP) and Previous page (PP) – are used to select another page. These pages are independent of each other so that if lines of text scroll off a page, the other pages are unaffected.

There is no error indication from the hand-held computer if the memory required by the selected number and size of pages exceeds the memory available in the computer.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 163

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

Screen

# of Rows

This parameter defines the logical page length (in lines) used by the host computer application. Emulator systems trim the host application screens to this length. This page length cannot be smaller than the length of the hand-held’s display. Display panning is used if the page is longer than the display.

Note: The value in this parameter must be an even number.

# of Cols

This parameter defines the logical page width (in characters) used by the host computer application. Emulator systems trim the host application screens to this width. This page width cannot be smaller than the width of the display. Display panning is used if the page is wider than the display.

Note: The value in this parameter must be an even number.

Default font

This parameter determines the default font that appears when the 7535 memory is reset. The allowable values are: 16x30 , 19x30 , 19x40 , 22x15 , 22x20 , 22x24 ,

22x30 , 22x48 , 33x30 , 33x40 , 33x48 , 8x15 , 8x20 (Thai), 9x12 (Arabic),

10x9 (Traditional Chinese), 10x15 , 11x10 (Korean), 12x24 (Thai), 13x12 ,

13x15 , 13x20 , 14x30 , 15x21 , 16x15 (Traditional Chinese), 16x15 (Korean),

16x15 (Simplified Chinese).

• Use the <RIGHT> or <LEFT> arrow key to scroll through the available options.

80-col. font & 132-col. font

These parameters are used to set the font size on the screen if the default font is not acceptable. An escape sequence must be sent from the host before a hand-held can switch to either 80-col .

font or 132-col .

font .

• Use the <RIGHT> or <LEFT> arrow keys to scroll through the size options for these parameters. The font sizes are listed in “Default Font” above.

164 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

Screen

Video

06 Video

Bold

Blink

Reverse

Underline

NONE

BLNK

REV

ULIN

Range see text see text see text see text

The possible attributes for these parameters are: “BLNK” (blink), “ULIN”

(underline), “REV” (reverse), and “NONE” (normal).

Bold

This parameter specifies the actual video attributes to be assigned to fields created with the “Bold” ANSI attribute.

Blink

This parameter specifies the actual video attributes to be assigned to fields created with the “Blink” ANSI attribute.

Reverse

This parameter specifies the actual video attributes to be assigned to fields created with the “Reverse” ANSI attribute.

Underline

This parameter specifies the actual video attributes to be assigned to fields created with the “Underline” ANSI attribute.

Label F1-F6

Note: This menu uses string entry fields. For detailed information about com-

pleting this type of field, refer to “String Entry Parameters” on page 135.

Label F1-6 06

F1

•

•

•

F6

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 165

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

Xmit Modes

Softkeys are function keys that have been programmed to perform specific actions in your application. These keys are identified through softkey labels – reverse video labels that are displayed at the bottom of the screen. These softkey labels can be reconfigured using the menu attached to the “Label F1-F6” parameter.

To edit a label:

• Position the cursor in the appropriate function key field within the

Label menu, and type a new name – preferably one that describes the corresponding key’s function.

Note: Although you can enter up to 9 characters for each softkey label, the text will be shortened to better fit in the available space on your display.

Colour Override

06 Colour Override

Foreground

Background

Black

White

Range see text see text

Foreground And Background

When “Colour Override” is set to ‘Y’, the colours chosen in this menu are displayed in the ANSI sessions. These colour settings will override the “Default Colours” set from within the “View Manager” menu. Refer to “Default Colours” on page 160 for details.

The allowable values are: Red , Green , Yellow , Blue , Magenta , Cyan , White and Black .

6.17.1.3 Xmit Modes

05 Xmit Modes

Xmit Count

Xmit Wait

Dev Attr

Auto-Answer

7 bit

Block Mode

Range

99

1

0..99

0..999

[ ? 62 ; 1 ; 2 ; 6 c see text

Y

» see text

Y/N see text

166 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

Xmit Modes

Xmit Count

This parameter determines how many characters from the keyboard or scanner are buffered by the 7535 before being transmitted to the host. If 0 (zero) is selected, the hand-held transmits only according to the “Xmit Wait” parameter. If the ANSI block mode features are used, this parameter should be set to 99.

Note: If the 7535 is not in local edit mode, the <ENTER>, arrow, <CTRL>, and function keys cause an immediate radio transmission regardless of the “Xmit Count” parameter setting.

Xmit Wait

This parameter determines the length of time the 7535 collects keystrokes before transmitting them to the host. This value is specified in increments of one 10th of a second (i.e., a value of 10 represents 1 second). If 0 (zero) is selected, the computer transmits only according to the “Xmit Count” parameter.

Note: If the 7535 is not in local edit mode, the <ENTER>, arrow, <CTRL>, and function keys cause an immediate radio transmission regardless of the “Xmit Wait” parameter setting.

Dev Attr

This string entry parameter specifies a device attribute string. This string can be up to 16 characters long. The computer sends this string to the host when it receives a

DA or DECID control. The example shown in the “Xmit Modes” screen sample on page 166 is the device attribute sent to a VAX, identifying the Psion Teklogix handheld computer as a VT220 terminal. This parameter may or may not be set, depending on the requirements of the host computer.

Auto-Answer

This string can be up to 30 characters long and is sent by the 7535 as a reply to an “ENQ” character from the host. The “Auto-Answer” string is programmable in the same manner as the keyboard macros. For example, this string can be used to automatically send the username and password when logging into the host. Refer to "Macros" beginning on page 145 for additional details about macros.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 167

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

Xmit Modes

7 bit

When this parameter is disabled (set to “N”), the hand-held computer transmits 8 bit controls. When enabled (set to “Y”), the hand-held transmits 7 bit controls. This parameter applies to character mode, block mode, and media copy mode.

Block Mode

06 Block Mode

Kbd lock

Xmit key

FETM

GATM

MATM

SATM

TTM

EOL chars

EOB chars

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

All modes in this section affect the data stream sent to the host computer, the serial port and the console port. These modes apply to the Block mode (Local Editing) and the Media Copy function, unless otherwise noted. Consult the Teklogix ANSI

Terminal Programmer’s Manual for more information.

Kbd lock

When this parameter is disabled (set to “N”), the 7535 does not lock the keyboard after a block mode transmission. When enabled (set to “Y”), the keyboard is locked after a transmission. The application program must unlock the keyboard by resetting the Keyboard Action Mode (KAM), using the Reset Mode (RM) or Enable Manual

Input (EMI) controls.

Xmit key

When this parameter is disabled (set to “N”), the key that causes the 7535 hand-held to transmit is not sent to the host as part of the transmitted data. When enabled

(set to “Y”), the key that causes a transmission is sent after the page data has been sent to the host. This parameter applies only to block mode.

168 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

Xmit Modes

FETM

When the Format Effector Transfer Mode (FETM) parameter is disabled (set to

“N”), Format Effectors are inserted in data sent to the host or included in data when transferred to the console or serial ports. When enabled (set to “Y”), the Format

Effectors are not inserted into the data sent to the host and are not included in the data transferred to the console or serial ports.

GATM

When the Guarded Area Transfer Mode (GATM) parameter is disabled (set to “N”), only unguarded data is transmitted to the host or transferred to the console or serial ports. When enabled (set to “Y”), both guarded and unguarded data can be transmitted to the host or transferred to the console or serial ports.

MATM

When the Multiple Area Transfer Mode (MATM) parameter is disabled (set to “N”), only the selected area containing the cursor can be transmitted to the host or transferred to the console or serial ports. When enabled (set to “Y”), all selected areas can be transmitted to the host or transferred to the console or serial ports.

This mode is significant only if the Selected Area Transfer Mode (SATM) is disabled.

SATM

When the Selected Area Transfer Mode (SATM) parameter is disabled (set to “N”), the selected areas defined by SSA/ESA and DAQ can be transmitted to the host or transferred to the console or serial ports. When enabled (set to “Y”), the full contents of the buffer can be transmitted to the host or transferred to the console or serial ports.

TTM

When the Transfer Termination Mode (TTM) parameter is disabled (set to “N”), the cursor position determines the end of the string that can be transmitted to the host or transferred to the console or serial ports. When enabled (set to “Y”), the cursor position is ignored.

EOL chars

This string entry parameter specifies a string of up to 8 characters that are sent after each line in a block transmission. If the parameter is not used, the rules specified in

“Transmitted Data Stream” are used to determine end of line characters.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 169

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

Kbd Modes

EOB chars

This string entry parameter specifies a string of up to 8 characters that are sent after each block transmission.

6.17.1.4

Kbd Modes

05 Kbd Modes

Arrow mode

Echo mode cursor

Smart

BKSP key DEL

PrintScreen key 16

Xmit Enter Y

Insert

Newline

N

N

Disable kbd N

DEC Cursor Keys cursor mode

Range cursor, field

Smart, Local, Host

DEL, BS

1..255

Y/N

Y/N

Y/N

Y/N see text

Arrow mode

This parameter determines whether arrow keys move the cursor within a field or between fields. When set to “field”, pressing an arrow key causes the cursor to move to the next field in the direction of the arrow. When set to “cursor”, pressing the <LEFT> and <RIGHT> arrow keys move the cursor within the current field.

Echo Mode

This parameter selects echo mode for the 7535. The available modes are “Local”,

“Host”, and “Smart”.

Local: In this mode, any character entered using the keyboard is displayed before being sent to the host. Certain keys cause additional action at the 7535, as shown in Table 6.5 on page 171.

Host: In this mode, the hand-held computer sends all keyboard entries to the host and displays only data received from the host.

Smart: This mode reduces or eliminates the delay between typing a character on the keyboard and displaying the character echoed by the host computer. The 7535 displays all printable characters on the

170 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

Kbd Modes screen before sending them to the host. The hand-held compares the characters echoed by the host to the characters placed on the page and fixes the display if the host echoes are different.

The maximum number of characters waiting for echo is 25.

Any additional characters are sent to the host but not displayed.

When the 7535 is in insert mode, smart echo is disabled.

ENTER

Key Function

In newline mode, this key moves the cursor to the first column of the next line. In line feed mode, this key moves the cursor to column one of the current line.

CTRL-G (Bell) The 7535 beeps.

CTRL-H (Backspace) The cursor moves back one space.

The cursor moves to the next horizontal tab stop.

CTRL-I (Tab)

CTRL-J (Line Feed)

CTRL-L (Form Feed)

CTRL-K (Vertical

Tab)

DEL

The cursor moves down one line in the same column.

The cursor moves down to the next line with a vertical tab set.

This key deletes the character to the left of the cursor and moves the cursor to the left by one position.

Table 6.5 Function Of Special Keys In Local Echo Mode

BKSP key

This parameter determines whether the <BKSP> key acts as a delete key, erasing the character to the right of the cursor, or a backspace key, erasing the character to the left of the cursor.

PrtScr key

This parameter determines the “hot-key” for printing the screen contents via the

7535 serial port. The default is <CTRL> P (16).

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 171

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

Kbd Modes

Note: The 7535’s port must be set to “printer” (see“Ports– Tether And Console” on page 191).

Xmit Enter

The <ENTER> key normally enters data into a field and moves the cursor to the next field. However, some applications require that the <ENTER> key start a transmission from the 7535. When enabled (set to “Y”), this parameter causes the

<ENTER> key to start a transmission.

Insert

When this parameter is disabled (set to “N”), it behaves in “replace” mode – a character entered at the keyboard or received from the host replaces the character at the cursor position. The cursor then advances one character position.

When enabled (set to “Y”), the character entered at the keyboard or received from the host is inserted at the cursor position after shifting the characters at and following the cursor forward one position. The cursor is advanced one position. The extent of the characters affected by the shift depends on the setting of the “Edit Extent” parameter (see page 173).

Newline

When this parameter is disabled (set to “N”), an LF character received from the host causes the cursor to move down one line in the same column. In addition, the <ENTER> key transmits a CR. When enabled (set to “Y”), an LF character received from the host causes the cursor to move to the first column of the next line. The <ENTER> key transmits both a CR and an LF.

Disable kbd

When this parameter is set to “N”, the keyboard and scanner are enabled.

Setting this parameter to “Y” disables the keyboard and scanner.

172 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

Edit Modes

6.17.1.5

Edit Modes

04 Edit Modes

Auto wrap

Erasure mode

Tab stop mode

Edit extent

Disp controls

N

N

N

Line

N

Range

Y/N

Y/N

Y/N see text

Y/N

Auto wrap

If “Auto wrap” is disabled (set to “N”), characters received when the cursor is at the right edge of the screen replace the previously displayed characters. If “Auto wrap” is enabled (set to “Y”), the cursor wraps to the next line when the current line is filled. The display scrolls up if the cursor is at the bottom margin.

Erasure mode

When this parameter is disabled (set to “N”), erase functions can only erase unprotected characters. When enabled (set to “Y”), the erase functions can erase characters regardless of their protected state.

Tab stop mode

When this parameter is disabled (set to “N”), the setting and clearing of horizontal tab stops apply to the same horizontal position of all lines on the page. When enabled

(set to ‘Y”), horizontal tab setting and clearing apply only to the current line.

Edit extent

This parameter selects the extent of the display to be affected by the ICH and DCH controls and received character insertion. The possible values are Line , Area ,

Display or Fld . The shifting caused by ICH, DCH and character insertion is confined to the selected extent.

Disp controls

When this parameter is disabled (set to “N”), any control codes received from the host are performed as described. When enabled (set to “Y”), any received control functions are displayed and are not performed. If any C0 or C1 controls are received from the host, their standard ANSI mnemonics are displayed in reverse video. Other characters are displayed as normal characters. This mode can also be set with the Set

Mode (SM) control but can only be reset from the Parameters menu.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 173

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

Serial

6.17.1.6

Serial

05 Serial Range

Primary Port Any Available see text

Secondary Port Any Available see text

Async In N Y/N

Start

End

0

0

0..255

0..255

Primary Port & Secondary Port

ANSI print commands (such as ‘MC’ or Media Copy) control the transfer of data to and from the serial and console ports on the 7535. At the 7535, the value assigned at the ‘Primary Port’ and ‘Secondary Port’ parameters determines which port the

ANSI print command will identify and use as primary and secondary. The allowable options are: Any Available , Ist printer , 2nd printer , 3rd printer ,

4th printer , 1st Serial , 2nd Serial , 3rd Serial , 4th Serial and

Disabled .

Async In

When this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), the serial (async) port is ready to receive input at all times.

Start/End

These parameters specify the “start” and “end” characters of input received from the serial (async) port.

6.17.1.7 Host Char Set

The ‘Host Char Set’ menu allows you to specify a character set in the ‘Lower’ and

‘Upper’ character tables.

05 Host Char Set

Lower VT220 Fren Cdn.

Upper Arabic IR-127

Note: When an 8-bit set is selected from the ‘Lower’ character set, the ‘Upper’ character set cannot be changed.

174 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

Anchor View

To choose ‘Lower’ and ‘Upper character sets:

• Position the cursor on the ‘Lower’ or ‘Upper’ parameter, and press the

<RIGHT> or <LEFT> arrow key to display the character set options.

• Press <F4> to save your selection to memory.

Important: When a character sent from the host cannot be displayed, a rectangular box is used as a substitute.

6.17.1.8 Anchor View

05 Anchor x origin y origin

Range

1 1..24

1 1..80

When enabled (set to “Y”), this parameter locks the display at a defined location on the screen, preventing it from shifting when the cursor is moved. The “x origin” and

“y origin” coordinates specify where the screen origin, the upper left corner of the screen, will be fixed.

x origin and y origin

The “x origin” parameter is used to specify the column to which the upper left corner of the screen will be anchored. The “y origin” parameter is used to specify the row coordinate to which the screen will be anchored.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 175

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

TESS Settings

6.17.2 TESS Settings

04 TESS

Auto Term # N»

Terminal # 1

Host Conn

Screen

»

»

Characters

Tests

Features

Scanner

»

»

»

»

Fields »

Anchor View N»

Range see text see text see text see text see text see text see text see text see text

Each session you create has its own “Settings” parameters. Additional TESS information is documented in “TESS Emulation” on page 120.

Auto Term#

Note: Refer to “Group” on page 176 for additional instructions.

When this parameter is set to “Y”, a unique unit number is assigned for the current

TESS session. If “Auto Term#” is set to “Y”, any value assigned to the “Terminal #” parameter is ignored.

Note: “Auto Term#” is available when 802.IQv2

is assigned to the “Host

Conn” parameter (page 177) or when 802.IQv1

is enabled in the Radio

Menu (see “802.IQ v1” on page 143).

Group

Auto Term#

Group 1

Range

1-5

When “Auto Term#” is set to “Y”, the ‘Group’ parameter is used to identify the

group or pool of numbers from which an auto-address is chosen.

Terminal #

For every application session you create, the “Terminal #” assigned must be nonzero and unique. This parameter defines the terminal number for the TESS session and uniquely identifies all transmissions to and from the 7535.

176 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

Host Conn.

Other applications running in the 7535, such as an ANSI session or another TESS session must each have a different number. In addition, each Psion Teklogix 7535 using the radio link must have a unique number.

6.17.2.1 Host Conn.

Host Conn Range

Conn Type 802.IQv2

see text

Settings » see text

Conn Type

The options for this a parameter vary depending on the type of application you are running – ANSI or TESS.

For TESS applications, this parameter allows you to choose one of the following types of connections: 802.IQv2

, 9010t (TCP Direct), 2392/Telnet ,

3274/Telnet and 5250/Telnet .

Settings

Note: The “Settings” sub-menu is not available when 802.IQv2

is selected as the “Conn Type”

Settings Range

Host

Port 9999 see text

0-9999

Host

This parameter is used to assign a host IP address using the format ###.###.###.###

Port

“Port” specifies the port number. By default, the port is assigned the value 9999.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 177

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

Screen

6.17.2.2 Screen

05 Screen

# of Cols

# of Rows

Origin Scroll

Field Scroll

80

Pages Saved

Fields/Page

App. Parameter 0

Label F1-6 »

Colour Override N»

24

N

N

16

80

Range

20..132

4..100

Y/N

Y/N

1..16

20..80

-1..79

see text see text

# of Cols

This parameter defines the logical page width (in characters) used by the host computer application. Emulator systems trim the host application screens to this width. This page width cannot be smaller than the width of the 7535 display.

Display panning is used if the page is wider than the display.

Note: The value in this parameter must be an even number.

# of Rows

This parameter defines the logical page length (in lines) used by the host computer application. Emulator systems trim the host application screens to this length. This page length cannot be smaller than the length of the hand-held computer’s display.

Display panning is used if the page is longer than the display.

Note: The value in this parameter must be an even number.

Origin Scroll

When enabled (set to “Y”), the display window moves to the origin (upper-left corner) after “LOCK-H” or “LOCK-B” messages.

Field Scroll

When enabled (set to “Y”), the display window moves to the left after entering a new entry field.

178 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

Screen

Pages Saved

This parameter determines the number of pages that can be stored and recalled at the 7535. Storing frequently used page data at the 7535 reduces the need for the host to retransmit complete page data over the radio link. Retransmitting data can reduce the system response time. Increasing the number of saved pages decreases the available memory for other functions.

App. Parameter

The “Application” parameter is sent to the host system as part of the response to the TESS query command. Enter zero to disable this parameter.

Label F1-F6

Note: This menu uses string entry fields. For detailed information about completing this type of field, refer to “String Entry Parameters” on page 135.

Label F1-6 06

F1

•

•

•

F6

Softkeys are function keys that have been programmed to perform specific actions in your application. These keys are identified through softkey labels – reverse video labels that are displayed at the bottom of the screen. These softkey labels can be reconfigured using the menu attached to the “Label F1-F6” parameter.

To edit a label:

• Position the cursor in the appropriate function key field within the

Label menu, and type a new name – preferably one that describes the corresponding key’s function.

Note: Although you can enter up to 8 characters for each softkey label, the text will be shortened to better fit in the available space on your display.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 179

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

Characters

Colour Override

06 Colour Override

Foreground

Background

Black

White

Range see text see text

Foreground And Background

When “Colour Override” is set to ‘Y’, the colours chosen in this menu are displayed in the TESS sessions. These colour settings override the “Default Colours” set from within the “View Manager” menu. Refer to “Default Colours” on page 160 for details.

The allowable values are: Red , Green , Yellow , Blue , Magenta , Cyan , White and Black .

6.17.2.3 Characters

05 Characters Range

Char Set »

V Match Char 0 see text

0..255

H Match Char 0

Fill Chr

Upper Case

46

N

0..255

0..255

Y/N

Char Set

06 Char Set

ISO N »

IBM

DEC

Misc.

Y »

N »

N »

This menu contains all the character sets available with your Psion Teklogix computer. In this menu, the “Y” or “N” is used to visually guide you to the selected character set. For example, in the sample menu above, the “Y” next to IBM indicates that a character set has been chosen from this group.

180 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

Characters

To choose a character set:

• Position the cursor on the appropriate item – for example, ISO – and press

<F1> to display the character set options.

• To activate a character set, press the <RIGHT> or <LEFT> arrow key to set it to “Y”.

Important: If you choose a Chinese character set from the ‘Misc.’ menu and a character sent from the host cannot be displayed on the 7535 screen, a shaded box character is used as a substitute. Please review “Default font” on page 189.

If you are using a Korean character set, a right arrow character is used as a substitute.

V Match Chr

This parameter enables visible field matching and defines the character that identifies visible field match data from the host. Field matching allows the host to pre-load data into an entry field that is compared with the user’s input. The hand-held beeps if the entered data does not match. Visible field matching means that the data to be matched is displayed in the entry field.

Enter the decimal value for the ASCII character that will be used by the host to identify visible match field data. Enter 0 (zero) to disable this feature.

Note: Another method of field matching is available directly through the

TESS data stream.

H Match Chr

This parameter enables hidden field matching and defines the character that identifies hidden field match data from the host. Field matching allows the host to pre-load data into an entry field that is compared with the user’s input. The 7535 beeps if the entered data does not match. Hidden field matching means that the data to be matched is not displayed in the entry field.

Enter the decimal value for the ASCII character that will be used by the host to identify hidden match field data. Enter 0 (zero) to disable this feature.

Note: Another method of field matching is available directly through the

TESS data stream.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 181

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

Tests

Fill Chr

This parameter specifies the character that identifies empty entry fields. Enter the ASCII decimal equivalent of this character. The most commonly used characters are:

_ (underline)

.

(period)

Enter 95

Enter 46

Note: 7535s in some systems may use the “space” character with the host using reverse video attributes to mark entry fields.

Upper Case

When this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), lowercase input is converted to uppercase.

6.17.2.4

Tests

05 Tests

AutoRep Fn

AutoRep T/O

7

5

Range

0..63

0..255

AutoRep Fn

This parameter determines which function key is sent to the host in auto reply mode.

The value represents the number of the function key – not the ASCII decimal equivalent. After sending this key, the unit locks and waits for the host to unlock the

7535. To disable “AutoRep Fn”, set the “AutoRep T/O” parameter to zero.

AutoRep T/O

This parameter determines the time (in seconds) between the 7535 unlocking and the next transmission of the function key specified by the above parameter.

A value of zero disables auto reply mode.

182 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

Features

6.17.2.5 Features

05 Features

Printer

Binary print

Queuing

Lcl Process

Send Mile

Next X

Kbd Locked

Serial

Y

N

Y

Y »

N

N

N

»

Range

Y/N

Y/N

Y/N see text

Y/N

Y/N

Y/N see text

Printer

This parameter enables and disables the pins in the serial port used for printers or other external devices.

Binary print

When this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), the page displayed on the 7535 computer is spooled as is, except for trailing white-space removal. When disabled

(set to “N”), each line of the page displayed on the hand-held is preceded by a linefeed (LF) and followed by a carriage return (CR).

Queuing

This parameter enables and disables queuing mode (see “Queuing Mode” on page 128). It also enables TESS procedures to be loaded into the 7535. This parameter should be enabled if local procedures and the ability to switch between hosts within a TESS session are required. Changes to this parameter take effect only after the 7535 is reset.

Lcl Process – Save on Reset

The menu item “Local Process” has a sub-menu attached to it – “Save on Reset”.

When this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), data stored in the 7535 is saved if the unit is reset. Local procedures are defined on page 127.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 183

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

Features

Send Mile

This parameter controls the sending of a milestone from the 7535 after a “hey_you” command. Consult the Teklogix Screen Subsystem (TESS) User Manual for more information on milestones.

Next X

This parameter enables and disables the next messages used in queuing mode.

Kbd Locked

This parameter allows you to lock (set to “Y”) or unlock (set to “N”) the keyboard for all alphanumeric input in TESS. When the keyboard is locked, the function keys, arrow keys and the <ENTER> key are still functional. The 7535 emits an error beep if a character is rejected because the keyboard is locked. Changes to this parameter take effect only after the unit is reset.

Seria

l

06 Serial

Serial Port Any Available

Serial Out

Serial In

SI mode

Y

N

SI prefix

SI suffix

SI CRC

SI Fkey

SO prefix

SO suffix

SO CRC

10

13

N

0

10

13

N

Range see text

Y/N

Y/N see text

0..255

0..255

Y/N

0..255

0..255

0..255

Y/N

Serial Port

TESS print commands control the transfer of data to and from the serial and printer ports on the 7535. At the 7535 computer, the value assigned at the ‘Serial Port’ parameter ranks which port the TESS print command will identify and use as the first to fourth port. The allowable options are: Any Available , 1st Serial ,

2nd Serial , 3rd Serial , 4th Serial and Disabled .

184 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

Features

Serial Out

This parameter enables serial port output fields.

Serial In

This parameter enables the serial port input fields. If enabled (set to “Y”), the TESS application has exclusive use of the serial port. Acceptance of data in a SI field is determined by the SI prefix and suffix.

SI mode

The possible values for this parameter are field (the default) and command . When the SI mode is set to field , data received through the serial port is displayed in the serial input fields. If you are using serial-input fields, make sure the “SI mode” parameter is set to field .

When “SI mode” is set to command , data received by the serial port is transmitted as

Passthrough data to the host.

Note: “Command” mode is supported by SDKs but not by emulations.

SI prefix

This parameter determines the start-of-message character on serial input. Enter an

ASCII numeric equivalent from 0 to 255 to represent the start character. A value of

0 (zero) indicates no prefix.

SI suffix

This parameter determines the end-of-message character on serial input. Enter an

ASCII numeric equivalent from 0 to 255 to represent the end character. A value of

0 (zero) indicates no suffix.

SI CRC

This parameter enables or disables CRC validity check on serial input. When enabled (set to “Y”), a packet is rejected if the CRC is not valid.

Also, when this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), each time a DLE (^P=0x10) character is encountered in the serial input, it is removed and the character following it will be replaced with its 1’s complement.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 185

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

Scanner

SI Fkey

This parameter allows you to choose the function key you want appended to the serial input. For example, entering a value of “1” appends <F1> to serial input. A value of “0” (zero) disables this parameter; a suffix is not added.

Note: Data is transmitted as soon as the function key has been appended.

SO prefix

This parameter determines the start-of-message character on serial output. Enter an

ASCII numeric equivalent from 0 to 255 to represent the start character. A value of

“0” (zero) indicates no prefix.

SO suffix

This parameter determines the end-of-message character on serial output. Enter an

ASCII numeric equivalent from 0 to 255 to represent the end character. A value of

“0” (zero) indicates no suffix.

SO CRC

When this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), a CRC16 value is appended to the serial output message.

Also, when this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), for each control character in the serial output stream, a DLE is inserted to precede that character. The control character is replaced with its 1’s complement.

6.17.2.6 Scanner

05 Scanner

Cont Nxt Fld

Append Enter

Append F0

Mixed AIAG

Rjct if Alpha

Beam Lockout

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

Range

Y/N

Y/N

Y/N

Y/N

Y/N

Y/N

186 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

Scanner

Cont Nxt Fld

This parameter only applies to string entry data. When enabled (set to “Y”), this parameter allows bar codes that are longer than the field length to continue in the next field.

If “ContNxtField” is disabled (set to “N”), OFF data will flow into the next field.

Append Enter

When enabled (set to “Y”), “Append Enter” causes an <ENTER> code to be appended to the bar code. The <ENTER> code completes the entry of the bar code and moves the cursor to the next field.

Append F0

When enabled (set to “Y”), this parameter causes an <F0> code to be appended to the bar code. The <F0> code completes the entry of the bar code data in the field.

Mixed AIAG

When this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), AIAG labels are always accepted and processed – even if mixed with keyboard input. The AIAG label can replace the partially entered keyboard data. If this parameter is disabled, AIAG labels are rejected if field entry is in progress.

Rjct if Alpha

When the cursor is in a numeric field and “Rjct if Alpha” is enabled (set to “Y”), bar codes containing alphabetic characters are rejected.

Beam Lockout

When enabled (set to “Y”), this parameter disallows scanner use when the current session is in “LOCK-H” mode.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 187

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

Fields

6.17.2.7 Fields

05 Fields Range

Field Order

Enter To F0

Y

Y

Enter On Arrow Y

Video »

Y/N

Y/N

Y/N see text

All Fld Video Y Y/N

Default Font 16x30 see text

Entry Mode field see text

Open Fky Only N

Ign Bcode_fld N

Enh Edit Mode N

Y/N

Y/N

Y/N

Field Order

This parameter determines the mode of cursor movement between fields. The next field can be defined by location on the screen or by the assignment of field numbers.

When enabled (set to “Y”), the cursor moves according to field location. If disabled

(set to “N”), the cursor moves according to the numeric order of the fields.

Enter To F0

The <ENTER> key normally enters data into a field and moves the cursor to the next field. However, some applications require that the <ENTER> key start a transmission from the 7535. When enabled (set to “Y”), this parameter causes the

<ENTER> key to be interpreted as <F0> which starts a transmission.

Enter On Arr

When this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), the arrow keys can be used to complete data entry into a field.

188 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

Fields

Video

06 Video

Blink

Bold

Reverse

BLNK

ULIN

REV

Range see text see text see text

Blink

The value assigned to this parameter specifies the actual video attributes to be assigned to fields created with the “Blink” TESS attribute – that is, “BLNK” (blink),

“ULIN” (underline), “REV” (reverse) or “NONE” (normal).

Bold

The value assigned to this parameter specifies the actual video attributes to be assigned to fields created with the “Bold” TESS attribute – that is, “BLNK” (blink),

“ULIN” (underline), “REV” (reverse) or “NONE” (normal).

Reverse

The value assigned to the “Reverse” parameter specifies the actual video attributes to be assigned to fields created with the “Reverse” TESS attribute – that is, “BLNK”

(blink), “ULIN” (underline), “REV” (reverse) or “NONE” (normal).

All Fld Video

Usually, the video attributes apply only to the text that is in an entry field. When this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), the entire field (including blanks) takes on the video attributes. Some systems use this option to identify empty entry fields with reverse video.

Default font

This parameter determines the default font that appears when the memory is reset.

The allowable values are: 16x30 , 19x30 , 19x40 , 22x15 , 22x20 , 22x24 , 22x30 ,

22x48 , 33x30 , 33x40 , 33x48 , 8x15 , 8x20 (Thai), 9x12 (Arabic),

10x9 (Traditional Chinese), 10x15 , 11x10 (Korean), 12x24 (Thai), 13x12 ,

13x15 , 13x20 , 14x30 , 15x21 , 16x15 (Traditional Chinese), 16x15 (Korean),

16x15 (Simplified Chinese).

• Use the <RIGHT> or <LEFT> arrow key to scroll through the options.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 189

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

Anchor View

Entry Mode

“Entry Mode” parameters allow you to select a data entry mode. The modes are: insert , replace , field and fcursor . “TESS Edit Modes And Cursor

Movement” on page 122 describes these modes in detail.

Open Fky Only

When this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), the screen is open for function keys only, and the cursor is not positioned. When this parameter is disabled, the screen is open for data entry, and the cursor is placed in the first field (if it exists).

Ign Bcode_fld

When this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), fields that were defined as “bar code only” accept data from the keyboard as well as the bar code reader. In effect, they behave as data entry fields.

Enh Edit Mode

This mode provides extended (enhanced) functions to users of Psion Teklogix’ IBM

5250 terminal emulation. When this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), the arrow keys move the cursor anywhere on the screen, unrestricted by fixed or entry fields.

Certain 5250 emulation keys (e.g. Field Exit) that were originally available only when “Enh Edit Mode” was set to “Y” are now active at all times in TESS applications.

Refer to “IBM 5250 Emulation Keys” on page 121 for details about these keys.

6.17.2.8 Anchor View

05 Anchor x origin y origin

Range

1 1..24

1 1..80

When enabled (set to “Y”), this parameter locks the display at a defined location on the screen, preventing it from shifting when the cursor is moved. The “x origin” and

“y origin” coordinates specify where the screen origin, the upper left corner of the screen, will be fixed.

190 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

Ports– Tether And Console

x origin and y origin

The “x origin” parameter is used to specify the column to which the upper left corner of the screen will be anchored. The “y origin” parameter is used to specify the row coordinate to which the screen will be anchored.

6.18 Ports– Tether And Console

03 Ports

Tether Port

Settings 1

Console Port

Settings 2

Console

»

Disabled

»

6.18.1 Tether And Console Port Peripheral Options

The “Tether Port” and “Console Port” options allow you to enable, disable and specify the accessories attached to these ports. Both the Tether Port and the Console

Port have the same options. These are: Disabled , Serial , Console , Printer and Scan-See .

To scroll through the options for each port:

• Press the <RIGHT> or <LEFT> arrow key.

These ports operate differently depending on the accessories selected.

• Disabled – indicates that the serial port is not being used.

• Serial – standard serial port.

• Console – used to connect another PC to the 7535. A communication program is required so that communication can proceed between the 7535 and the PC.

• Printer – all TESS print operations are directed to the port. All ANSI media copy operations to the “primary port” are directed to this port.

• Scan-See – TESS and ANSI accepts input from the Scan-See through the

Tether or Console port.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 191

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

Tether And Console Port Parameter Settings

6.18.2 Tether And Console Port Parameter Settings

The parameters for the “Tether Port” and “Console Port” are identical.

04 Settings Range

Character Set »

Baud 9600 see text see text for range of baud rates

Data Bits

Parity

Stop Bits

Flow Ctrl

Buffer

Retries

Input Tmo

Output Tmo

Test

8 6..8

none none odd even mark space

1 1, 1.5, 2

None None Software

512

3

2

5

Y

1..2048

1..100

1..100

1..100

Y/N

Character Set

These menus define the character set for the 7535 port.

Important: When a character sent from the host cannot be displayed, a right arrow character is used as a substitute.

Char Set

ISO

IBM

DEC

Misc.

N »

Y »

N »

N »

This menu contains all the character sets available with your Psion Teklogix computer. In this menu, the “Y” or “N” are used to visually guide you to the selected character set. For example, in the sample menu above, the “Y” next to IBM indicates that a character set has been chosen from this group.

192 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

Tether And Console Port Parameter Settings

Choosing A Character Set

To choose a character set:

• Position the cursor on the appropriate item – for example, ISO – and press

<F1> to display the character set options.

• To activate a character set, press the <RIGHT> or <LEFT> arrow key to set it to “Y”.

Important: If you choose a Chinese character set from the ‘Misc.’ menu and a character sent from the host cannot be displayed on the screen, a shaded box character is used as a substitute.

If you are using a Korean character set, a right arrow character is used as a substitute.

Baud

This parameter determines the bit rate of the port. Allowable values include: 110

300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 14.4

kbps 19.2

kbps 38.4

kbps

56.0

kbps 57.6

kbps 115.2

kbps 128.0

kbps or 256.0

kbps.

Data Bits

This parameter determines the number of bits for the data going through this port.

Possible values are: 6, 7, 8 .

Parity

This parameter determines the type of parity checking used on the data going through the port. The options are: none , odd , even , mark and space .

Stop Bits

This parameter specifies the number of stop bits – 1, 1.5, 2 – used for asynchronous communication.

Flow Control

This parameter selects the type of flow control used in your hand-held computer.

The 7535 can perform XON/XOFF ( Software ) handshaking.

The function of each mode is as follows:

Enable: Used to input and output data.

Supports XON/XOFF or no handshaking.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 193

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

Tether And Console Port Parameter Settings

Print: Used to output data only. All input characters except XON and

XOFF are ignored.

Supports XON/XOFF or no handshaking.

Output: Used to output data only. All input characters are ignored.

Supports no handshaking.

Note: To enable the input and/or output, ‘serial in’ and/or ‘serial out’ must be enabled in the TESS menu.

Buffer

The value assigned to this parameter determines the size of the serial buffer used by the application for both input and output. The buffer controls the amount of data the application can send to or receive from a serial device.

Retries

This parameter determines the number of times the 7535 attempts to transmit a byte from the serial port. If the count specified in this parameter is exceeded, the transmission fails.

Input Tmo

This parameter sets the time in tenths of a second that the 7535 waits before passing received data to the TESS or ANSI tasks.

Output Tmo

The value assigned at this parameter determines the maximum number of milliseconds that the application will wait for a ‘write’ sent to the port to succeed before it is aborted. The ‘write’ may be one or several bytes in length.

Test

When this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), data is output through the serial port to make certain that it is operating appropriately.

194 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

Tether And Console Port Scan-See Parameters

6.18.3 Tether And Console Port Scan-See Parameters

When ‘Scan-See’ is specified as the peripheral for either the Tether or the Console port, the parameters listed under the “Scan-See” sub-menu are used to tailor the operation of this type of scanner. The other parameters listed in this menu –

“Character Set”, “Baud” and so on – are identical to those described beginning on page 191.

05 Scan See

Character Set »

Baud 9600

Data Bits

Parity

Stop Bits

Retries

Input Tmo

Scan-See

8 none

1

3

2

»

6.18.3.1 Scan-See Sub-Menu – Mapping The Viewport

05 Scan-See

Anchor Line

Anchor Column

Follow Cursor

Line Offset

Column Offset

Wraparound

Panning

Line Scrolling

Brightness

Arrows

Version

XON/XOFF

1

19

Y

0

0

N

Y

N

3

Bright

2

Y

Range

0...1

0...19

Y/N

-25...25

-80...80

Y/N

Y/N

Y/N

0 to 5

Bright Horz Vert

0...2

Y/N

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 195

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

Scan-See Sub-Menu – Mapping The Viewport

The Scan-See display is mapped to a specific area on the 7535 screen – called the viewport – and is continuously updated to reflect that portion of the screen. The

Scan-See viewport is defined as follows:

Anchor Line/Anchor Column

A location on the Scan-See display – the anchor – is chosen as a reference point.

Line Offset/Column Offset

A predefined displacement – the offset – is added to the location of the 7535 cursor to create a point – the pivot . This pivot is mapped to the anchor , and whatever is displayed in its vicinity is also displayed on the Scan-See.

For example:

• the anchor is chosen as (9,0) whereas “9” is the column and “0” is the line

(on the Scan-See display)

• the offset is chosen as (4,2)

• the cursor on the 7535 is currently located at (7,5)

• the pivot would thus be located at (7+4, 5+2) or (11,7)

• and so the area displayed on the Scan-See will be:

(11–9,7–0) to (11–9+9,7–0+1) or (2,7) to (11,8).

1

1

These computations assume that “Wraparound” (described on page 198) is disabled

(set to “N”) and that “Follow Cursor” (described on page 198) is enabled (set to “Y”).

196 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

Scan-See Sub-Menu – Mapping The Viewport anchor

(0,0)

0

1

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

(9,0)

Scan-See Display

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 . . .

6

7

4

5

8

2

3

0

1

9

10

11

(0,0) terminal cursor

(7,5) offset

+4

+2

(11, 7) pivot = terminal cursor

+ offset offset

(4

,2)

Terminal Display

+4

+2

superimposing the anchor on the pivot

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 . . .

9

10

11

7

8

5

6

0

3

4

1

2

(0,0)

(2,7 ) anchor

Scan-See Viewport

(11, 7)

(11, 8) pivot

Note: To enter negative values, press the “-” (minus) key and then, type the number you want to use.

The <LEFT> arrow key can also be used to decrement the value assigned to the parameter. Each time the <LEFT> arrow is pressed, the number is decremented by one. For example, to enter a value of “–5”, start from zero and press the left arrow key five times.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 197

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

Scan-See Sub-Menu – Mapping The Viewport

Follow Cursor

When the “Follow Cursor” parameter is disabled (set to “N”), the cursor is always assumed to be located at the origin. Using the previous example:

• the area displayed will be (4–9,2–0) to (4–9+9, 2–0+1), or, after clipping values that are negative or higher than 80: (0,2) to (4,3).

Wraparound

When “Wraparound” is enabled (set to “Y”), the Scan-See display is treated as a one-line by 20 column display, rather than 2 lines by 10 columns.

Panning

If “Panning” is disabled (set to “N”), the Scan-See viewport does not move when the cursor moves one position to the right, and the pivot is still inside the Scan-See display. However, the Scan-See display is updated to reflect the changes within that viewport. If the pivot goes outside the viewport, or if the 7535 display changes without the cursor being moved, the viewport is re-synchronized to coincide the pivot with the anchor.

Line Scrolling

When “Line Scrolling” is enabled (set to “Y”), the Scan-See display is treated as two separate one line by 10 column displays. The top line always displays the previous value of the bottom line. In an application where the cursor skips from one entry field to another, the field that the cursor just entered is displayed on the top line, and the next field is displayed at the bottom.

Note: When this feature is enabled (set to “Y”), the “Panning” option should be disabled to prevent updates to both lines after every keystroke

Brightness

The “Brightness” parameter controls the backlight brightness of the display. It only has an effect on Model 7000 Scan-Sees – scanners equipped with LED (light emitting diode) displays.

198 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

Scan-See Sub-Menu – Mapping The Viewport

Arrows

The “Arrows” parameter assigns one of three possible functions to the two arrow keys on the Scan-See keyboard:

Value Function

“Bright” Arrow keys control Scan-See display brightness

“Horiz” Arrow keys control “Column Offset”

“Vert” Arrow keys control “Line Offset”

Table 6.6 “Arrow” Parameter Options

Note: For “Horiz” and “Vert,” changing the offset will take effect only after the

7535 display has been updated.

Version

Scan-See units with serial numbers that read 1594120224 or higher contain firmware that implements a different communication protocol with the 7535 than older units. The “Version” numbers represent the following unit versions:

Value

0

Scan-See Version

• First LED version – up to serial number 1594080275; these are encased in grey plastic.

1

2

• Model 7000 LED units – versions after the serial number above; these are also encased in grey plastic.

• Metrologic 7000M LCD units; these are encased in grey plastic.

• Psion Teklogix 7000M LCD units; these are encased in black plastic.

Table 6.7 Scan-See Versions

Note: To interface the 7535 to the Scan-See units with older firmware

(serial number lower than 1594120224), set “Parity = space”; all other parameters are identical to the newer firmware.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 199

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

Scan-See Keyboard Mapping

XON/XOFF

Important: IF YOU ARE USING TRANSCEIVERS WITH YOUR

SCAN-SEE, this parameter must be set to “Y”.

When this parameter is set to “Y”, the XON and XOFF characters are not passed to the TESS or ANSI tasks. A received XOFF character stops the serial port from transmitting. A received XON character starts the serial port transmissions again.

6.18.3.2 Scan-See Keyboard Mapping

• Digits (0-9) are passed verbatim

• The CLR key forces a sign-on message and display refresh. This only occurs when CLR is pressed and the CLR key on the display is pressed, then released.

• The three F-keys are mapped to F1, F2 and F3, respectively.

• The ENT key is mapped to the carriage-return (‘\r’) character.

• The two arrow keys are handled locally, and control the brightness, and the line and column offsets, as described on page 198.

• Bar-code data is stripped off any identifying headers (symbology, etc.) and passed verbatim.

The Scan-See is capable of displaying only a subset of the default PC-8 ASCII character set. Any characters that cannot be displayed are currently translated to ‘.’.

200 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

Network

6.19 Network

03 Network

Ctrl Panel

802.IQv2

»

»

6.19.1 Network Ctrl Panel Settings

This option displays a Windows CE screen where you can set up your radio, launch an existing network connection or create a new connection.

Figure 6.9 Network Settings

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 201

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

NETWLAN – Configuring The Radio

6.19.1.1 NETWLAN – Configuring The Radio

The ‘NETWLAN1’ icon displayed in this window is used to configure the radio installed in the 7535.

Figure 6.10 NETWLAN Icon

Follow the steps outlined in “Configuring An IEEE 802.11 Radio” on page 18 for details about configuring your radio.

6.19.2 802.IQ v2

Important: For setup information about 802.IQ v2, refer to the “9400 and

9450 Network Controllers User Manual” and/or the “9150

Wireless Gateway User Manual”.

Range 802.IQ v2

Port 8888

More Parameters » see text see text

Port

“Port” specifies the UDP port used by 802IQ v2. The default value is 8888. Keep in mind that the value assigned here must match the value set at the network controller.

Note: When using 802.IQ v2, make certain that the 7535 “Net Mask” matches the network controller net mask.

202 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 6: Tekterm Application

802.IQ v2

More Parameters

Important: The 802.IQ radio items listed in this menu are only available to

Psion Teklogix personnel.

Auto Radio Addr

If this parameter is set to “Y”, the 7535 requests an automatically assigned radio address.

Note: If ‘Auto Radio Addr’ is enabled (set to “Y”), any value assigned to the

‘Radio Address’ parameter is ignored.

Radio Address

Important: “Radio Address” only takes effect when “Cellular” is enabled (set to “Y”).

The value entered in the “Radio address” parameter is used to identify the 7535 hand-held over the radio link. A unique value from 1 to 3840 must be assigned for each 7535.

Initial RTT (Round Trip Time)

Round trip time is the elapsed time between a 7535 hand-held computer transmis-

sion and an access point acknowledgement. Each 7535 continuously adjusts the acceptable round trip time, calculating the average elapsed time over a number of transmissions. If an acknowledgement takes longer to receive than the average round trip time calculated, the 7535 will resend the transmission.

Because 7535s cannot calculate an average round trip time without a number of transmissions, a starting point or “Initial Round Trip Time” is required. The 7535 uses the time assigned to the “Initial RTT” parameter as a starting value for round trip calculations. Once the 7535 begins transmitting and receiving data, this value will be adjusted to reflect the actual average round trip time between transmissions and acknowledgements.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 203

P

ERIPHERAL

D

EVICES

& A

CCESSORIES

7.1 External Bar Code Readers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

7.1.1 PowerScan™ Standard, LR and XLR Bar Code Scanners . . . . . . 207

7.1.2 Entering Data With The Bar Code Reader. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

7.2 The 7535 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

7.2.1 Lithium-Ion Battery Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

7.3 Important Charger Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

7.4 Chargers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

7.5 Gang Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

7.5.1 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

7.5.2 Operator Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

7.5.3 Charge Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

7.5.4 Charging Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

7.5.5 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

7.5.5.1 Excessive Charge Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212

7.5.5.2 Indicator Flashing Red . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212

7.5.5.3 Power LED Does Not Light Up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213

7.5.5.4 Indicator Does Not Light When Battery Installed . . . . . . .213

7.6 Combo Charger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

7.6.1 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

7.6.2 Operator Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

7.6.3 Using the Combo Charger With The 7535. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

7.6.4 7.2.4 Charging The Spare Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

7.6.5 Charge Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

7.6.6 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

7.7 Combo Dock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

7.7.1 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

7.7.2 Using The Combo Dock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

7.7.3 Network Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 205

7.7.4 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

7.8 Quad Dock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

7.8.1 Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

7.8.2 Indicators And Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

7.8.3 Using The Quad Dock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

7.8.4 Network Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

7.8.4.1 Network Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

7.8.5 Battery Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

7.8.6 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

7.8.6.1 Network Link Unsuccessful . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

7.8.6.2 7535 LED Does Not Light When Docked . . . . . . . . . . . 219

7.8.6.3 7535 Battery Does Not Charge When Docked . . . . . . . . . 219

7.9 Portable Docking Module (PDM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

7.10 Bluetooth Peripherals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

7.11 The 7535 Picker Cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

7.11.1 Mounting Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

7.11.1.1 Mounting Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

7.11.2 Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

7.11.3 Using The Picker Cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

7.11.4 Maintaining The Picker Cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

7.11.5 The Powered Cradle Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

7.11.5.1 Wiring Vehicle Power To The Cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

7.11.6 The Port Replicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories

External Bar Code Readers

7.1 External Bar Code Readers

7.1.1 PowerScan™ Standard, LR and XLR Bar Code Scanners

Note: Refer to “SE1200 High Performance & Long Range Specs” on page 232 for detailed specifications.

The 7535 supports Psion Teklogix’ PowerScan™ industrial bar code scanner with standard, long range and extra long range options.

To connect this scanner to the 7535, attach the device to the tether port at the upperright side of the 7535. Before using the bar code reader, you may need to change some parameters. For details, review “Scanner Properties” on page 86 and “Bar

Codes” on page 89.

7.1.2 Entering Data With The Bar Code Reader

Note: For helpful scanning tips, refer to “Scanning Techniques” on page 51.

When a label is scanned successfully, the 7535 will beep if configured appropriately and the scan LED will flash. Occasionally, the bar code labels are poorly printed or damaged and cannot be read properly. In this case, use the keyboard to enter data from the label.

7.2 The 7535 Battery

Note: Battery specifications are detailed in“Lithium-Ion Battery Pack” on page 240.

7535 Lithium-Ion batteries operate for a minimum of eight hours

1

after a charge.

These batteries do not require conditioning. Typical battery life is 300 cycles or 3 years average use. A full charge is completed in 4 hours with a typical charge time of 1.5 hours.

1

Times are approximate and may vary depending on operating conditions.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 207

Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories

Lithium-Ion Battery Safety Precautions

7.2.1 Lithium-Ion Battery Safety Precautions

Important: It is critical that this safety information be reviewed and that all warnings be strictly followed.

Warning: BATTERIES ARE CONSIDERED HAZARDOUS WASTE and must be returned to Psion Teklogix for proper disposal. All used batteries must be forwarded to one of the following offices:

Psion Teklogix Inc.

2100 Meadowvale Blvd.

Mississauga, Ontario

Canada

L5N 7J9

Psion Teklogix Corp.

1810 Airport Exchange Blvd.

Suite 500

Erlanger, Kentucky

USA 41018

Psion Teklogix S.A.

La Duranne; 135 Rue Rene Descartes; BP 421000

13591 Aix-En-Provence

Cedex 3; France

Warning: TO PREVENT the battery from leaking acid, generating heat or exploding, adhere to precautions listed below.

• The battery incorporates built-in safety devices. To ensure their proper function, do not disassemble or alter any parts of the battery.

• Do not short-circuit the battery by directly connecting any of the exposed terminals with metal objects such as wire. Do not transport or store the battery together with metal objects such as necklaces, hair pins, etc.

• Do not dispose of batteries in fire.

• Do not use or leave the battery near a heat source such as a fire or heater.

• Do not immerse the battery in water.

• When charging, use the battery charger specifically designed for the battery.

• Do not pierce, strike, throw or step on the battery.

• Do not directly solder the battery.

• Do not connect the battery to an electrical outlet, vehicle cigarette lighter, etc.

• Do not put battery into a microwave oven or pressurized container.

• Do not use the battery in combination with primary batteries (such as dry-cell batteries) or batteries of different capacities or brands.

• Immediately remove the battery from the device or battery charger and stop use if the battery gives off an odor, generates heat, becomes discoloured or deformed, or in any way appears abnormal during use.

208 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories

Important Charger Safety Instructions

• Do not continue charging the battery if it does not recharge within the specified charge time.

• The battery may burst or ignite if the battery leaks. Always ensure that it is away from any exposed flames.

• If leaking electrolyte sprays into your eyes, rinse them with clean running water, and immediately seek medical attention.

• Do not store the battery in extremely high temperatures (e.g., a vehicle, strong direct sunlight, etc.). This may cause the battery to overheat or ignite, and it may also reduce the performance and service life of the battery.

• Do not use in areas where static electricity is greater than what the manufacturer guarantees.

• Keep batteries out of reach of children.

7.3 Important Charger Safety Instructions

• SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS – This manual contains important safety and operating instructions for battery charger s.

• Before using the battery charger, read all instructions and cautionary markings on (1) battery charger, (2) battery, and (3) product using battery.

• Use of an attachment not recommended or sold by the battery charger manufacturer may result in fire, electric shock, or personal injury.

• To reduce risk of damage to the electric plug and cord when unplugging the charger, pull the plug rather than the cord.

• Make sure the cord is positioned so that it is not stepped on, tripped over, or otherwise subjected to damage or stress.

• Do not operate the charger with a damaged cord or plug.

Replace immediately.

• Do not operate the charger if it has received a sharp blow, been dropped, or otherwise damaged in any way; it should be inspected by qualified service personnel.

• Do not disassemble the charger; it should be repaired by qualified service personnel. Incorrect reassembly may result in electric shock or fire.

• To reduce risk of electric shock, unplug the charger from the outlet before attempting any maintenance or cleaning.

• An extension cord should not be used unless absolutely necessary. Use of an improper extension cord could result in fire or electric shock.

If an extension cord must be used, make sure:

• The plug pins on the extension cord are the same number, size, and shape as those on the charger.

• The extension cord is properly wired and in good electrical condition and that the wire size is larger than 16 AWG.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 209

Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories

Chargers

• Do not expose the charger to rain or snow.

• Do not place batteries in the charger if they are cold from extended exposure to a freezer or outside temperatures below 10°C (50°F). Allow them to warm up to room temperature for at least two hours.

• Do not use the charger if, after an overnight charge, any of the batteries feel warmer than the charger housing. The charger should be inspected by qualified service personnel.

• Do not use the charger if any of the batteries or the charger get more than lukewarm. The equipment should be inspected by qualified personnel.

7.4 Chargers

Note: The full capacity of the battery may not be reached until at least 5 full charge/discharge cycles have been performed.

It can take from 1.5 to 4 hours to charge a battery. The 7535’s intelligent charging system protects the battery from over-charging by terminating the charge process when the battery is at maximum capacity.

Important: To preserve battery integrity, the charger will proceed with a charge only when the battery temperature falls between 0˚ C and

39˚ C (32˚ F to 102˚ F). If the battery is too hot or cold, the battery status LED flashes yellow and the charge is suspended.

7.5 Gang Charger

The gang charger is designed to charge up to six 7535 Lithium-Ion batteries at one time. Your charger is shipped with the appropriate IEC mains power cord. If the supplied power cord is incorrect for your country, contact Psion Teklogix for assistance (see Appendix A: Support Services And Worldwide Offices).

7.5.1 Installation

The gang charger can be wall mounted using the wall mount kit – PN TBD – or it can be operated on a flat surface. Install the charger in an area that is free from excessive dirt, dust and contaminants. The ambient temperature must be in the range

0˚ C to 39˚ C (32˚ F to 102˚ F). The charger will not charge batteries outside of this temperature range. For maximum performance, it is recommended that the charger be operated at room temperature – a temperature range between

18˚ C to 25˚ C (64˚ F to 77˚ F).

210 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories

Operator Controls

The charger can consume up to 2A @ 120VAC or 1A @ 240VAC. Check to ensure the mains circuit supplying the charger is adequate for this loading (especially if several chargers are being powered from the same circuit).

After unpacking the unit:

• Visually check the charger for damage.

• Install the IEC power cord and apply power.

A green indicator in the lower-right lights to indicate power is present. All charge indicators flash momentarily at powerup to indicate that the charger is ready for operation.

If you choose to wall mount the charger, follow the instructions packaged with the mounting bracket kit. Be sure to locate the charger in a area where there is no risk of injury to persons walking in the vicinity.

7.5.2 Operator Controls

The gang charger does not have operator controls or a power switch.

7.5.3 Charge Indicators

Each battery charge slot is equipped with a tri-coloured LED to indicate the charge status of the battery. When 7535 batteries are inserted in the charger, the colour and behaviour of the LEDs associated with the charge wells in use indicate the status of the charge.

LED Behaviour

Off

Solid green

Flashing green

Solid yellow

Flashing yellow

Solid red

Flashing red

Charge Status

No battery detected in the slot.

Battery is fully charged.

Battery is charged to 75% capacity.

Charge in progress.

Battery temperature out of charge range between 0˚ C to 39˚ C (32˚ F to 102˚ F).

Charging is attempted every five minutes until the battery is within the appropriate temperature range.

Battery rejected (at insertion) or unable to complete charge on battery

Charging circuit problem. Refer to

“Troubleshooting” on page 212.

Table 7.1 Gang Charger Indicators

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 211

Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories

Charging Batteries

7.5.4 Charging Batteries

• Install the battery with the battery contacts facing the charger. Slide the battery between the guide rails until it lightly latches in place.

The LED directly below the slot in which a battery is inserted lights up immediately.

A solid yellow LED indicates that the battery is being charged. If the battery temperature is outside 0˚ C to 39˚ C (32˚ F to 102˚ F), the LED flashes yellow until the temperature is acceptable. A fully discharged battery will normally take between 1.5 and 4 hours to charge. When the battery charge reaches 75%, the indicator flashes green. At full capacity, it turns solid green.

When the battery is fully charged, the charger stops applying power; the battery cannot be overcharged if left in the charger slot. The 75% charge indicator is handy if you need a quick recharge – it often occurs after less than an hour.

7.5.5 Troubleshooting

7.5.5.1

Excessive Charge Duration

The charger is equipped with a recalibration function – a function that fully discharges and then fully recharges the battery. This process is necessary to recalibrate the battery capacity gauge internal to the battery. The charger attempts recalibration when:

• the battery capacity is at less than 30%, and

• the battery has undergone more than 40 partial charge cycles since the last full discharge.

A complete battery discharge takes between 1.5 and 4 hours to complete. When in discharge mode, the LED indicator flashes yellow. The recalibration function extends the charge time by up to 2 hours.

7.5.5.2

Indicator Flashing Red

If the indicator flashes red:

• Remove all batteries and disconnect the mains power cable.

• Wait at least 20 seconds, and then plug the cable in again.

If any of the charge slot LEDs continue to flash red, the charger is defective and requires service. If all indicators are flashing red, there is a power supply problem and the charger requires service.

212 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories

Power LED Does Not Light Up

7.5.5.3

Power LED Does Not Light Up

• Remove all batteries, and unplug the charger.

• Connect another device to the mains outlet to ensure there is power.

• Remove the IEC mains power cable from the charger, and check it for damage.

• Reconnect the mains cable in the charger and mains outlet.

If the power LED still does not light up:

• Unplug the mains cable, and check the fuse at the rear of the charger.

If the fuse appears to be intact, the charger requires service.

7.5.5.4

Indicator Does Not Light When Battery Installed

• Remove the battery, and clean the contacts on the battery and the charge slot.

• Reinstall the battery, and check that it is fully seated in the slot.

• Inspect the charge slot contacts for damage (are they bent, flattened, twisted or broken).

• Try inserting a battery that you know to be working in the charger slot.

• Reconnect the mains power cable, and check that the slot indicator flashes at powerup.

7.6 Combo Charger

The 7535 combo charger is a desktop charger designed to charge the 7535 internal battery along with a spare battery pack. The combo charger provides sufficient power to operate and fast charge the 7535 internal battery, while recharging the spare battery pack.

7.6.1 Installation

Keep the combo charger away from excessive dirt, dust and contaminants. The combo charger will not charge batteries outside an ambient temperature range of

0˚ C to 39˚ C (32˚ F to 102˚ F). It is recommended that this charger be operated at room temperature – between 18˚ C and 25˚ C (64˚ F to 77˚ F) for maximum performance.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 213

Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories

Operator Controls

After unpacking the unit:

• Visually inspect the charger for possible damage.

• Install the IEC power cord and apply power.

A green LED in the lower-right corner of the front panel lights to indicate that power is present. The charge LED flashes momentarily at powerup. The charger is now ready for operation.

7.6.2 Operator Controls

The combo charger has no operator controls or power switch.

7.6.3 Using the Combo Charger With The 7535

• Gently slide the 7535 into the cradle portion of the combo charger until lightly latched. An icon is displayed indicating that the 7535 is properly installed in the combo charger – .

The battery charge LED on the 7535 lights up indicating that the unit has external power and battery charging may begin. It is safe to leave the 7535 in the combo charger cradle while it is not in use – the battery will not be overcharged.

7.6.4 7.2.4 Charging The Spare Battery

• Install the battery with the latch facing towards the rear of the charger – slide it between the guide rails until it lightly latches in place.

The LED for the slot lights up immediately. A solid yellow LED indicates the battery is being charged. A flashing yellow LED indicates that the battery temperature is outside the acceptable charge range – between 0˚ C and 39˚ C

(32˚ F to 102˚ F).

A fully discharged battery normally takes between 1.5 and 4 hours to charge. When the battery capacity reaches 75%, the LED flashes green. When the battery is at full capacity, the indicator turns solid green.

The combo charger stops applying power to the battery when it is fully charged – there is no risk of overcharge if the battery remains in the charge slot. The 75% charge indicator is handy if you need a quick recharge – a quick charge often takes less than one hour.

214 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories

Charge Indicators

7.6.5 Charge Indicators

The spare battery charge slot has an associated tri-colour LED indicator on the lower-right area of the front panel.

LED Behaviour

Off

Solid green

Flashing green

Solid yellow

Flashing yellow

Solid red

Flashing red

Charge Status

No battery detected in the slot.

Battery is fully charged.

Battery is charged to 75% capacity.

Charge in progress.

Battery temperature outside the charge range of between

0˚ C to 39˚ C (32˚ F to 102˚ F). Charging is attempted every five minutes until the battery is within the appropriate temperature range.

Battery rejected (at insertion) or unable to complete charge on battery.

Charging circuit problem. Refer to “Troubleshooting” on page 212 for details.

Table 7.2 Combo Charger Indicators

The combo charger supplies DC power to enable the 7535 internal fast charger.

Charge status is displayed on the 7535 charge LED – the lower-right LED. Refer to

“Charge LEDs” on page 46 for details.

Normally, it takes 1.5 and 4 hours to fully charge the 7535 internal battery.

Note: Battery charging continues whether the 7535 is switched on or off.

7.6.6 Troubleshooting

The gang charger troubleshooting section also applies to the combo charger. Refer to “Troubleshooting” on page 212, for helpful tips.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 215

Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories

Combo Dock

7.7 Combo Dock

The combo dock is identical to the combo charger with one exception – the combo dock is equipped with a 10/100 BaseT Ethernet interface. The charging information in “Combo Charger” beginning on page 213 also applies to the combo dock.

7.7.1 Installation

Refer to the “Installation” guidelines for the combo charger beginning on page 213.

• Attach a CAT5 RJ45 network patch cable (shipped with the combo dock) between your network and the RJ45 jack on the rear of the dock.

A green LED is illuminated next to the RJ45 connector when a valid network link is established.

A user application needs to be loaded onto each 7535 that utilizes the combo dock for communication. With the network connected and this application loaded, the combo dock is ready for use.

7.7.2 Using The Combo Dock

• Gently slide the 7535 into the cradle portion of the combo dock until lightly latched. The 7535 detects combo dock and displays the appropriate icon – .

The battery charge LED (lower-right LED) on the 7535 lights up to show it has external power and may start charging the battery.

Interaction with the 7535 while in the combo dock is a function of the user application software used to communicate with the host network.

7.7.3 Network Access

The combo dock includes a dedicated USB to Ethernet converter. This USB converter appears as a USB slave to the 7535 USB host controller. The 7535 automatically detects insertion into a combo dock and loads the appropriate drivers to communicate with the USB/Ethernet converter.

See “Network Addressing” on page 218 for details about network addressing issues with the combo dock.

216 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories

Troubleshooting

7.7.4 Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting issues for the combo dock are identical to those of the quad dock.

Refer to “Troubleshooting” on page 219 for helpful tips.

7.8 Quad Dock

The Quad Dock permits each of four docked 7535 hand-helds to communicate with a 10/100 BaseT Ethernet network at greater than 2Mbps. It also provides sufficient power to operate and fast charge the batteries the 7535s.

7.8.1 Installation

The quad dock should be located away from excessive dirt, dust and contaminants.

The ambient temperature must fall between 0˚ C to 39 ˚C (32˚ F to 102˚ F). The

7535 internal charger will not charge batteries outside of this temperature range. For maximum performance, it is recommended that the quad dock be operated at room temperature – from 18˚ C to 25˚ C (64˚ F to 77˚ F).

The quad dock can consume up to 3A @ 120VAC or 1.5A @ 240VAC. Ensure that the mains circuit supplying the unit is adequate, especially if several docks are being powered from the same circuit.

After unpacking the unit:

• Visually inspect the unit for any damage.

• Install the IEC power cord and apply power.

A green indicator in the lower-right corner of the front panel lights up to indicate that power is present.

• Attach a CAT5 RJ45 network patch cable (supplied) between your network and the RJ45 jack on the rear of the dock.

A green LED is illuminated next to the RJ45 connector when a valid network link is established.

A user application must be loaded onto each 7535 that utilizes the quad dock for communication. When the network is connected and this application is loaded, the quad dock is ready for use.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 217

Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories

Indicators And Controls

7.8.2 Indicators And Controls

The quad dock has no user controls. It is equipped with a power indicator LED and

RJ45 link and traffic indicator LEDs. When a valid network link is established, a green LED is illuminated next to the RJ45 connector.

7.8.3 Using The Quad Dock

• Gently slide the 7535 into the cradle portion of the quad dock until lightly latched.

The 7535 detects that it is in a quad dock and displays the appropriate icon in the taskbar – . The battery charge LED on the 7535 lights up to show it has external power and may start charging the battery.

Interaction with the 7535 while in the quad dock is a function of the user application software used to communicate with the host network.

7.8.4 Network Access

The quad dock includes a four port 10/100 Ethernet hub. Each of the four downstream ports are connected to dedicated USB-to-Ethernet converters. These

USB converters appear as USB slaves to the 7535 USB host controller. The 7535 automatically detects insertion into a quad dock and loads the appropriate drivers to communicate with the USB/Ethernet converters.

7.8.4.1

Network Addressing

Although the USB converters have fixed Ethernet MAC addresses, there is generally no correlation between these addresses and a specific 7535 hand-held. The host application uses a standard TCP/IP protocol to name, locate and communicate with a 7535 on the network.

If a link is established between a 7535 and a host, the application on the host and on the 7535 must have a recovery mechanism in the event that the 7535 is removed from the dock and the link is interrupted.

218 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories

Battery Charging

7.8.5 Battery Charging

The quad dock supplies DC power to enable the 7535 internal fast charger. Charge status is displayed on the 7535 charge LED (see “Charge LEDs” on page 46).

Battery charging continues whether the 7535 is switched on or off.

Normally, it takes between 1.5 and 4 hours to fully charge the 7535 internal battery.

7.8.6 Troubleshooting

The indicators, applications and drivers required to use and monitor the docking station are installed on the 7535 – no indicators or applications are present on the docking station itself.

7.8.6.1

Network Link Unsuccessful

If a network link fails, the 7535 application alerts the operator that the link was unsuccessful.

7.8.6.2

7535 LED Does Not Light When Docked

TBD

7.8.6.3

7535 Battery Does Not Charge When Docked

TBD

7.9 Portable Docking Module (PDM)

The Portable Docking Module (PDM) clips onto the base of the 7535 and is most often used to charge the 7535 battery when a desktop charger is not convenient. The

PDM also offers additional communication ports, making it useful for upgrading software in the 7535 from a USB-equipped laptop computer. Figure 7.2 on page 221 illustrates the connectors on the PDM.

• Align the pins on the PDM with the connectors on the base of the 7535.

• Gently snap the PDM into place on the base of the unit. Figure 7.1 on page 220 provides a visual representation of how to secure the PDM.

Important: The latching mechanism on the PDM is designed for quick installation and release. It is not meant for heavy duty use.

Psion Teklogix recommends using a powered cradle or combo charger in harsh environments.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 219

Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories

Portable Docking Module (PDM)

Align the pins on the PDM with the connectors on the base of the 7535, and gently snap the PDM onto the hand-held.

Connector Pins

Figure 7.1 Snapping The PDM To The Base Of The 7535

220 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories

Portable Docking Module (PDM)

Type B USB Device

RS232 Serial Port

Type A USB Host

15 VDC Power Jack

Figure 7.2 PDM Ports And Connectors

The interfaces available on the PDM are as follows:

• DC power jack (15VDC @ 2.5A)

• USB host port (for connection to USB devices such as a mouse, keyboard, printer, etc.)

• USB device port (for connection to a USB host such as a PC)

• RS232D DTE serial port (for connection to a PC COM port or a serial device such as a printer)

The standard Psion Teklogix PDM kit (PN 1030085) includes the necessary DC power supply, USB cables and RS232D 9-pin cable.

A cigarette lighter adaptor (PN TBD) is also available to connect the PDM to a vehicle’s power. Use only the recommended adaptor with the PDM – it includes transient suppressors that protect your 7535 from damage.

The PDM contains reverse polarity and over voltage protection. If the DC power jack is wired backwards or exceeds 20VDC, the PDM shuts down to protect the

7535, the PDM and the power supply from damage. Psion Teklogix does not recommend substituting the DC power supply provided with your PDM.

The DC power supplied by the PDM is sufficient to operate the 7535 and fast charge its internal battery at the same time. The 7535 can run from a PDM without a battery installed.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 221

Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories

Bluetooth Peripherals

7.10 Bluetooth Peripherals

If the 7535 is equipped with a Bluetooth radio, it is possible to communicate with a variety of Bluetooth peripherals, including GSM/GPRS handsets, scanners, printers, and so on. The range of the Bluetooth radio in the 7535 is limited to approximately

2 meters.

Psion Teklogix provides built-in support for the Bluetooth peripherals listed below.

If your system is equipped with one of these peripherals, you only need to associate the peripheral with a specific 7535 host in order to be up and running.

• GSM/GPRS tri-band universal handset (PN TBD)

• Bluetooth printer (PN TBD)

Keep in mind that Bluetooth and IEEE 802.11b radios both operate in the 2.4GHz band. Although the 7535 includes features to minimize interference, performance of the system will not be optimal if you use both radios simultaneously. Typically, when both radios operate in the 7535 at the same time, they cannot transmit simultaneously – this has a negative impact on overall system throughput. To minimize the impact on the backbone 802.11b network, Psion Teklogix recommends using Bluetooth peripherals that have low transaction rates (such as printers and scanners).

Bluetooth peripherals are configured using the Bluetooth control panel applet. See

TBD for more details about Bluetooth device configuration. In addition, review the manual shipped with your Bluetooth device to determine the method used to associate with the 7535 host.

7.11 The 7535 Picker Cradle

The 7535 picker cradle is a highly ruggedized, single station dock. Although it provides quick insertion and removal,, the cradle holds the 7535 securely even when operated in high vibration environments (such as vehicles not equipped with suspensions).

The7535 base picker cradle can be outfitted with two options – a power module and a port replicator. Psion Teklogix also supplies a range of standard mounts for the hand-held picker cradles, and the 7535 picker cradle is compatible with all of them.

222 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories

Mounting Recommendations

7.11.1 Mounting Recommendations

Warning: Before mounting a picker cradle in a vehicle, there are a number of operator safety issues that require careful attention. An improperly mounted cradle may result in one or more of the following: operator injury, operator visibility obstruction, operator distraction and/or poor ease of egress for the operator. Psion Teklogix strongly recommends that you seek professional mounting advice from the vehicle manufacturer.

Cable routing within a vehicle cab also requires careful consideration, especially for separately tethered scanners and other devices with loose cables. If you are unable to obtain suitable advice,

contact Psion Teklogix for assistance (see Appendix A: Support

Services And Worldwide Offices). Note also that for better protec- tion, the equipment should be mounted inside the vehicle roll cage.

Pedestal mounts are recommended for all fixed mount locations because they offer optimal operator access. In addition, for safety reasons, only pedestal mounts with fully locking joints are recommended. Always adjust the pedestal for the optimum viewing angle, and securely tighten the hex and wing screws.

The most effective way to mount the picker cradle is to use the four #8-32 threaded inserts on the rear of the unit. Bolts must not extend more than 10mm (3/8") into the cradle. All Psion Teklogix mounting hardware is compatible with this method.

Under special circumstances, it may be necessary to mount bolts through the cradle into a plate. In this case, the cradle requires partial disassembly.

To accommodate the surface loop of the connector cable, leave a 4" clearance at the bottom of the cradle. Leave a 7" clearance at the top of the cradle to allow easy removal of the 7535. Refer to the detailed assembly instructions that are packaged with the cradle for this application (PN TBD)

7.11.1.1

Mounting Template

The picker cradle is shipped with detailed mounting instructions including a drill template. [Drawing TBD].

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 223

Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories

Wiring Guidelines

7.11.2 Wiring Guidelines

Before installing the cables between the cradle and other devices, consider the following:

• Ensure that drilling holes will not damage the vehicle or its wiring.

• Protect cable runs from pinching, overheating and physical damage.

• Use grommets to protect cables that pass through metal.

• Use plastic straps to prevent cables and connectors from loosening.

• Keep cables away from heat sources, grease, battery acid and other potential hazards.

• Keep cables away from control pedals and other moving parts that may damage the cables or interfere with the operation of the vehicle.

• Leave enough extra cable so that the 7535 can be easily removed.

Note: Where applicable, ensure that the unit is mounted inside the roll cage.

7.11.3 Using The Picker Cradle

If your 7535 is equipped with a shoulder strap or cover, these accessories need to be removed before installing the unit in a picker cradle. There is no need to remove handstraps, pistol grips or tethered devices from the unit.

• Slide the 7535 into the cradle, and press downwards until it locks into place.

On a vehicle, it’s a good idea to pull up on the 7535 to be certain that it is secure.

• To remove the 7535, press on one of the knobs on either side of the cradle until it releases.

7.11.4 Maintaining The Picker Cradle

Two latches in the cradle hold the 7535 firmly in place. Although these latches are designed for at least 100,000 cycles, they will wear over time and will no longer lock the 7535 securely in the cradle. For replacement parts and instructions contact

Psion Teklogix (see Appendix A: Support Services And Worldwide Offices). Partial disassembly is required. The replacement latch components are identified in drawing # 1020030 Metalwork, part -94.

224 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories

The Powered Cradle Option

7.11.5 The Powered Cradle Option

The powered cradle option is designed to allow the 7535 to be powered by a vehicle battery. The battery installed in the 7535 is also recharged by the vehicle battery.

This option accepts DC power sources over the range 12V to 90V.

The 7535 picker cradle can be ordered with the powered cradle option installed, or it can be retrofitted later. If you are retrofitting a power cradle option, the supplied kit includes detailed installation instructions.

The 7535 charging LED (see Section 3.6.1.1 on page 46) indicates that external power is available, and it also indicates the charging status of the internal battery.

Warning: Applying a voltage above 90VDC or reversing polarity may result in permanent damage to cradle power option and will void the product warranty.

7.11.5.1

Wiring Vehicle Power To The Cradle

A 2 meter extension power cable (PN 13985) is supplied with your power cradle.

This cable should be wired to a filtered, fused (maximum 6A) accessory supply on the vehicle. The power cradle draws no more than 3.5A (less if the accessory supply is greater than 12V). Any additional wiring, connectors or disconnects used should be rated for at least 6A.

The red lead of the power cable attaches to the positive vehicle supply. The black lead connects to the negative supply – this should be connected to a proper terminal block and not to the vehicle body. The power cradle is fully isolated and can be used with both negative and positive chassis vehicles.

You may have the option of connecting power before or after the ‘key’ switch. It is preferable to wire the power cradle after the key switch – that is, it cannot be turned on without the key on. However, if the operator switches the key off repeatedly during a shift, it may make more sense to wire the cradle before the switch.

If an unfused power source must be used, a fuse assembly (PN 19440) must be added to the extension power cable (the fuse and instructions are supplied with the cable). Use only a 5A slow blow UL approved fuse in the fuse assembly.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 225

Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories

The Port Replicator

7.11.6 The Port Replicator

The port replicator is an optional accessory that allows tethered devices (e.g., scanners) as well as mounted peripherals (e.g., bar code printers or weigh scales) to be attached to the picker cradle. The replicator can be used with or without the cradle power option.

The functionality of the 7535 tether port is duplicated on the port replicator. When the 7535 is installed in a port replicated picker cradle, the tether port on the 7535 is disabled and the tether port on the port replicator is enabled. Although it is not necessary to remove a device connected to the 7535, keep in mind that it will not operate while in the cradle.

In addition to the tether port, the replicator is equipped with a standard 9 pin

RS232D serial interface. This interface is typically used for fixed peripherals such as printers. Your serial device likely includes a suitable cable connector for this port.

A port replicator can be retrofitted onto a cradle power option by replacing the blank bottom plate with a port replicator assembly using 4 screws. The kit includes the necessary instructions. Installing a port replicator on an unpowered cradle requires additional assembly steps. The upgrade kits vary – use PN TBD to upgrade a cradle power option, and PN TBD to upgrade an unpowered cradle.

An icon in the 7535 task bar indicates that a port replicator has been attached.

226 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

S

PECIFICATIONS

8.1 7535 Hand-Held Computer Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

8.2 Radio Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

8.3 Bar Code Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

8.3.1 Internal Scanners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

8.3.2 Internal Scanner Port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

8.3.3 External Scanners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

8.4 Internal Scanner Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

8.4.1 SE1200 High Performance & Long Range Specs . . . . . . . . . . . 232

8.4.2 SE1223 Advanced Long Range & SE2223 2-D Specs . . . . . . . . 233

8.4.3 Symagery SX4000 & Welch Allyn IT4200 Imager Specs. . . . . . . 234

8.5 External Scanner Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

8.5.1 PowerScan™ LR and XLR Industrial Scanner Specs . . . . . . . . . 236

8.5.2 PowerScan™ Standard Range Scanner Specs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

8.6 Lithium-Ion Battery Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 227

Chapter 8: Specifications

7535 Hand-Held Computer Specifications

Note: Performance specifications are nominal and subject to change without notice.

8.1 7535 Hand-Held Computer Specifications

Dimensions

Height

Width

Length

TBD

Weight

With batteries 700 grams

Operating System

Microsoft® Windows® CE.net Version 4.10

Processor And Memory

Intel PXA255 400Mhz CPU with 32 MB FLASH and 64 MB RAM standard.

Power Supply

Battery One user accessible, rechargeable lithiumion battery pack.

Intelligent fast charge.

Internal fast charger.

Communication

Ports

Environmental

Operating Temperature 0˚C to +50˚C (32˚F to +122˚F)

Short exposure to temperatures outside this range may cause the 7535 screen to become very dark or light temporarily.

Long exposure to temperatures below -40˚C

(-40˚F) may damage the screen. Prolonged exposure to temperatures above +60˚C

(+140˚F) will damage the main battery and

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 229

Chapter 8: Specifications

Radio Specifications

Storage Temperature

Rain And Water Resistance

Drop Rate

Display

Active Area

Backlight Control

Approvals

TBD

8.2 Radio Specifications

TBD

Transmit Power

Frequency Range

Channels temperatures above +70˚C may damage the unit (+158˚F).

-40˚C to 70˚C (-40˚F to 158˚F) without battery.

-40˚C to 60˚C (-40˚F to 140˚F) with battery.

IP 54 Low pressure, vertical spray, no immersion.

Multiple drops from 2 metres to concrete.

TBD

Data Rates

8.3 Bar Code Scanning

Scanner Types

Decoded Codes Supported

Decoded and non-decoded.

Non-Decoded Codes Supported Code 39, code 128, EAN 13, EAN 8,

EAN 128, UPC-A, UPC-E, Codabar,

Code 93, Code 11, Interleaved 2-of-5,

MSI/PLESSY, Discrete 2-of-5.

Dependent on external scanner choice.

230 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 8: Specifications

Internal Scanners

Code Discrimination Automatic for all selected codes, Non-

Decoded input. Decoded input is external scanner dependent.

8.3.1 Internal Scanners

Base Options

Scan Triggering

High performance, long range, advanced long range and 2-D raster laser scanner.

If an aiming dot is available on the installed scanner, the aiming dot will be enabled for a configurable time period after which normal scanning begins. Double-clicking trigger will override aiming delay and initiate immediate scan.

8.3.2 Internal Scanner Port

Compatibility Symbol SE1200HP, SE1200LR,

SE1200ALR, SE1200WA SE122x,

SE2223 2-D

8.3.3 External Scanners

Supported Types

Interface

Decoded and Non-Decoded 5V only.

Via tether port.

8.4 Internal Scanner Specifications

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 231

Chapter 8: Specifications

SE1200 High Performance & Long Range Specs

8.4.1 SE1200 High Performance & Long Range Specs

Parameter

7535 High Performance

(SE 1200HP)

Light Source

Laser Class

Visible Laser Diode,

675nm ± 5nm

CDRH Class II

DIN EN 60825: July

1993, Class 2

Laser Power

1.0 mW Max. Average Radiant

Power

Pulse Power Duration Continuous

Scan Angle

Scan Repetition

42˚ ± 2˚

36 ± 3 scans/second

(bidirectional)

Skew Tolerance

Pitch Angle

Roll Tolerance

± 65˚ from normal

± 55˚ from normal

± 20˚ from vertical

Specular Dead Zone ± 2˚ from normal

Decode Depth of Field

Minimum bar width is 5.0 mil

(0.127 mm)

Print Contrast

Minimum

Ambient Light

Immunity

20% absolute dark/light reflective measured at 675 nm.

Sunlight: 8000 ft. candles

Artificial Light: 450 ft. candles

Table 8.1 SE1200HP And SE1200LR Scanner Specifications

7535 Long Range

(SE 1200LR)

Visible Laser Diode,

650nm ± 5nm

CDRH Class II

DIN EN 60825: July

1993, Class 2

1.0 mW Max. Average

Radiant Power

Continuous

23˚ ± 2˚

36 ± 3 scans/second

(bidirectional)

± 60˚ from normal

± 65˚ from normal

± 10˚ from vertical

± 2˚ from normal

Minimum bar width is 10.0 mil (0.254 mm)

40% absolute dark/light reflectance measured at 675 nm.

Sunlight: 8000 ft. candles

Artificial Light: 450 ft. candles

232 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 8: Specifications

SE1223 Advanced Long Range & SE2223 2-D Specs

8.4.2 SE1223 Advanced Long Range & SE2223 2-D Specs

Parameter

Light Source

Scan Rate

Scan Angle

Horizontal:

Vertical

Scan Patterns

7535 Advanced Long Range

(SE 1200ALR)

7535 2-D

(SE 2223 2-D)

Visible Laser Diode 650 nm Visible Laser Diode 650 nm

35 (± 5) scans/sec (bi-directional) 590 scans/sec. 22 frames/sec.

Minimum Print

Contrast

Symbologies

Programmable

Parameters

Interfaces

13º

± 2º

12 position ZIF connector.

Symbol Standard SSI Interface with logic level serial data communications plus trigger, beeper and decode LED signals

34º

12.5º

Linear

Minimum 40% absolute dark/light reflectance measured at 650 nm

Laser On Time, Aim Duration,

Power Mode, Trigger Mode,

Bi-directional Redundancy,

Symbology types/lengths, Data formatting, Serial Parameters,

Beeper Tone

Linear and Smart Raster

- 35% absolute dark/light reflectance differential (PDF)

- 25% absolute dark/light reflectance differential (1-D)

UPC/EAN, Code 128, Code 39,

Code 93, I 2 of 5, Discrete 2 of 5,

Codabar, MSI UCC/EAN 128,

TriOptic Code 39

PDF417, Micro PDF,

UPC/EAN, Code 39,

Interleaved 2 of 5, Code 128,

Codabar, MSI Plessey, RSS and Composite codes

Laser On Time, Aim Duration,

Power Mode, Trigger Mode,

Bi-directional Redundancy,

Symbology types/lengths,

Data formatting, Serial Parameters, Beeper Tone, Scan

Angle, Pattern controls

12 position ZIF connector.

Symbol Standard SSI interface with logic level serial data communication plus trigger, beeper and decode LED signals

Ambient Light:

Artificial:

Sunlight:

450 ft. candles (4,844 lux)

8,000 ft. candles (86,112 lux)

Operating Temperature: -22º to 131ºF (-30º to 55ºC)

450 ft.-candles/4,844 lux

8,000 ft.-candles/86,112 lux with correct enclosure.

22º to 140° F/-30º to 60º C @

100% duty cycle

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 233

Chapter 8: Specifications

Symagery SX4000 & Welch Allyn IT4200 Imager Specs

Parameter

7535 Advanced Long Range

(SE 1200ALR)

Storage Temperature: -40° to 140°F (-40° to 60°C)

Humidity: 5% to 95% noncondensing

Power:

Input Voltage:

Input Current:

Standby Current:

Shock

5.0 VDC ± 10%

115 mA typical

70 µA max.

2,000 G

7535 2-D

(SE 2223 2-D)

-40º to 158º F/-40º to 70º C

5% to 95% noncondensing

±5VDC ± 10%

230mA

6.5mA

2,000 G

Table 8.2 SE1223ALR And SE2223 2-D Scanner Specifications

8.4.3 Symagery SX4000 & Welch Allyn IT4200 Imager Specs

Parameter

Symagery SX4000 &

Welch Allyn IT4200 Imager

Technology

Decode Performance

CMOS image capture

<100ms

First Time Read Rate Performance >98%

Bar Code Orientation 360˚ omni-directional

Upgradeable Symbology Support through firmware

Optical Resolution

1280H x 1024V - SX4000

640H x 480V - IT4200

Depth of Field

Field of View

Min. Contrast Resolution

Aiming

10.4cm to 18cm (10 mil)

10cm to 19.3cm (12 mil)

12.7cm to 26.6cm (15 mil)

47˚ H x 40˚ V

10%

LED line

Table 8.3 Internal Image Reader

234 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 8: Specifications

Symagery SX4000 & Welch Allyn IT4200 Imager Specs

Pitch

Scanner

Side View

Scan Beam

Pitch Angle

Barcode Surface

Skew

Scanner

Top View

Scan Pattern

Specular Dead Zone

Scanner

Side View Scan Beam

Skew Angle

Barcode Surface

< 2 º

Barcode Surface

Roll

Scanner

Side View Scan Beam

Barcode Surface

Figure 8.1 Pitch, Skew And Specular Dead Zone

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 235

Chapter 8: Specifications

External Scanner Specifications

8.5 External Scanner Specifications

8.5.1 PowerScan™ LR and XLR Industrial Scanner Specs

Communication

Undecoded Standard and Intermec-compatible.

Mechanical

Dimensions

Weight

Cable lengths

6.9 x 11.2 x 18.3 cm (2.7 x 4.4 x 7.2 in)

Scanner - 280 g (9.9 ozs)

Cable (82.3 cm 32 in) - 176 g (6.2 ozs)

Collapsed: 81 cm (32 in)

Max working: 183 cm (72 in)

Collapsed: 203 cm (80 in)

Max working: 305 cm (120 in)

Electrical

Operating voltage

Operating current - nominal

4 VDC to 14 VDC

Undecoded: 75 mA @ 5 VDC

Decoded: 100 mA @ 5 VDC

Idling current - low power mode < 50 µA @ 5 VDC

Optical

Light source

Scan System

Rate

Depth of field - Long Range

Extra bright 650 nm Visible Laser Diode

(VLD)

Frictionless lifetime flexure mechanism

35 scans/sec nominal

Paper Labels (decoded)

7.5 mil 6 to 10 in (15 to 25 cm)

10 mil 5 to 20 in (13 to 51 cm)

15 mil 5 to 32 in (13 to 81 cm)

20 mil 5 to 48 in (15 to 122 cm)

40 mil 8 to 85 in (20 to 216 cm)

55 mil 15 to 108 in (38 to 274 cm)

Reflective Labels (decoded)

40 mil 22 to 100 in (56 to 254 cm)

236 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Depth of Field-Extra Long

Range

Print Contrast Ratio

Pitch

Skew

Ambient Light Immunity

Chapter 8: Specifications

PowerScan™ LR and XLR Industrial Scanner Specs

55 mil 30 to 104 in (76 to 366 cm)

70 mil 40 to 180 in (102 to 457 cm)

100 mil 45 to 264 in (114 to 671 cm)

Paper Labels (decoded)

15 mil 28 to 60 in (71 to 152 cm)

20 mil 28 to 72 in (71 to 182 cm)

40 mil 28 to 144 in (71 to 144 cm)

55 mil 40 to 180 in (102 to 457)

Reflective Labels (decoded)

40 mil 40 to 180 in (102 to 457 cm)

70 mil 80 to 300 in (2032 to 762 cm)

100 mil 80 to 432 in (203 to 1097 cm)

25% minimum

± 65˚

± 55˚

Artificial light: 1200 ft. candles.

Sunlight: 8000 ft. candles.

Environmental

Temperature Rating

Humidity

Shock (at 23˚ C)

Vibration

Water and Dust

Decoding Capabilities

Auto-discriminates between:

Operating: -22˚ to 122˚ F (-30˚ to 50˚ C)

Storage: -40˚ to 158˚ F (-40˚ to 70˚ C)

5 to 95% NC

Withstands multiple 6 foot drops to concrete.

Meets MIL-STD-810E

IEC529 rating IP54DW

UPC A, E/EAN8, 13/JAN8, 13

(P2/P5, Code 128 EAN add-ons)

Code 128, MSI/Plessey, Code 39, Interleaved

2 of 5, Code 39 Full Ascii,

Standard 2 of 5, Code 93, Codabar,

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 237

Chapter 8: Specifications

PowerScan™ Standard Range Scanner Specs

Safety/Regulatory

Electrical

Emissions

Laser Classification

Complies to: Gost R; TUV; UL; cUL

Complies to: FCC-A;EN55022-B

BCIQCNS13438; AS/NZS3548;

VCCI-B

CDRH Class 2 (Caution: Laser radiation - do not stare into beam);IEC60825 Class 2

8.5.2 PowerScan™ Standard Range Scanner Specs

Communication

Undecoded Standard and Intermec-compatible.

Mechanical

Dimensions

Weight

Cable lengths

6.9 x 11.2 x 18.3 cm (2.7 x 4.4 x 7.2 in)

Scanner - 280 g (9.9 ozs)

Cable (82.3 cm 32 in) - 176 g (6.2 ozs)

Collapsed: 81 cm (32 in)

Max working: 183 cm (72 in)

Collapsed: 203 cm (80 in)

Max working: 305 cm (120 in)

Optical

Light source

Scan System

Rate

Depth of field - Standard

Extra bright 650 nm Visible Laser Diode

(VLD)

Frictionless lifetime flexure mechanism

35 scans/sec nominal

Paper Labels (decoded)

7.5 mil 3.0

to 6 in (9 to 15 cm)

10 mil 1.5

to 15 in (4 to 38 cm)

15 mil 1.0

to 25 in (2.5 to 64 cm)

20 mil 1.0

to 35 in (2.5 to 89 cm)

(paper) 55 mil 6.0

to 60 in (15 to 152 cm)

High Density (decoded)

3 mil 1.0

to 2 in (2.5 to 5.1 cm)

4 mil 1.0

to 3 in (2.5 to 8 cm)

238 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 8: Specifications

PowerScan™ Standard Range Scanner Specs

Print Contrast Ratio

Pitch

Skew

Ambient Light Immunity

Electrical

Operating voltage

Operating current - nominal

4 VDC to 14 VDC

Undecoded: 75 mA @ 5 VDC

Decoded: 100 mA @ 5 VDC

Idling current - low power mode < 50 µA @ 5 VDC

Environmental

Temperature Rating

Humidity

Shock (at 23˚ C)

Vibration

Water and Dust

Operating: -22˚ to 122˚ F (-30˚ to 50˚ C)

Storage: -40˚ to 158˚ F (-40˚ to 70˚ C)

5 to 95% NC

Withstands multiple 6 foot drops to concrete.

Meets MIL-STD-810E

IEC529 rating IP54DW

Decoding Capabilities

Auto-discriminates between:

5 mil 0.8 to 3.8 in (2 to 10 cm)

7.5 mil 0.6 to 4.5 in (1.5 to 11 cm)

10 mil 0.2 to 5.5 in (0.5 to 14 cm)

25% minimum

± 65˚

± 55˚

Artificial light: 1200 ft. candles.

Sunlight: 8000 ft. candles.

UPC A, E/EAN8, 13/JAN8, 13

(P2/P5, Code 128 EAN add-ons)

Code 128, MSI/Plessey, Code 39,

Interleaved 2 of 5, Code 39 Full Ascii,

Standard 2 of 5, Code 93, Codabar,

Safety/Regulatory

Electrical

Emissions

Laser Classification

Complies to: Gost R; TUV; UL; cUL

Complies to: FCC-A;EN55022-B

BCIQCNS13438; AS/NZS3548;

VCCI-B

CDRH Class 2 (Caution: Laser radiation - do not stare into beam);IEC60825 Class 2

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual 239

Chapter 8: Specifications

Lithium-Ion Battery Pack

8.6 Lithium-Ion Battery Pack

Technology Lithium-Ion (Li-Ion)

Operating Temperature

Charge Temperature

Storage Temperature

Charge Cycles

Charge Time

Voltage

Cell Configuration

Capacity

Supported Chargers

-20˚C to 60˚C (-4˚F to 140˚F)

0˚C to 39˚C (32˚F to 102˚F)

-30˚C to 60˚C (-22˚F to 140˚C)

(Storage at elevated temperatures is not recommended.)

Minimum of 300 charge cycles with no degradation below 70% of nominal capacity

Charge time is typically 1.5 hours.

7.4 V nominal (6V min. to 8.4V max.)

2 series connected cells

1800 mAh nominal at 300mA discharge

20˚C to 6.0V (minimum)

6-Gang Charger

Combo Charger

Combo Docking Station

Quad Docking Station

240 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

A

PPENDIX

S UPPORT S ERVICES A ND W ORLDWIDE O FFICES

A.1 Support Services

Psion Teklogix provides a complete range of product support services to its customers worldwide. These services include post-installation technical support and product repairs.

A.1.1 Canada and USA: Technical Support and Repair Services

In Canada and the U.S.A. these services can be accessed through the Psion Teklogix

Helpdesk. The Helpdesk coordinates repairs, helps you troubleshoot problems over the phone, and arranges for technicians or engineers to come to your site.

Canadian and U.S. customers may receive access to technical support services, ranging from phone support to emergency on-site system support, by calling the toll-free number below, or via our secure web site.

Note: Customers calling the toll-free number should have their Psion Teklogix customer number or trouble ticket number available.

Voice: 1 800 387-8898

Fax: 1 905 812-6304

Web Site: http://service.psionteklogix.com

A.1.2 International Support

For technical support outside of Canada or the U.S.A., please contact your local

Psion Teklogix office. See page A-3 for a listing of worldwide offices.

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual A-1

A.2 W

ORLD

W

IDE

O

FFICES

C OMPANY H EADQUARTERS

A ND C ANADIAN S ERVICE C ENTRE

Psion Teklogix Inc.

2100 Meadowvale Boulevard

Mississauga

Ontario

Canada L5N 7J9

Tel: +1 905 813 9900

Fax: +1 905 812 6300

Email: [email protected]

N ORTH A MERICAN H EADQUARTERS

A ND U.S. S ERVICE C ENTRE

Psion Teklogix Corp.

1810 Airport Exchange Boulevard

Suite 500

Erlanger, Kentucky

USA 41018

Tel: +1 859 371 6006

Fax: +1 859 371 6422

Email: [email protected]

I NTERNATIONAL S UBSIDIARIES

Psion Teklogix GmbH

Jakob Kaiser Straße 3

D-47877 Willich Münchheide

Deutschland

Tel: +49 2154 9282 0

Fax: +49 2154 9282 59

Email: [email protected]

Psion Teklogix S.A.

La Duranne

135 Rue Rene Descartes

BP 421000

13591 Aix-En-Provence

Cedex 3; France

Tel: +33 (0) 4.42.908.809

Fax: +33 (0) 4.42.908.888

Email: [email protected]

Psion Teklogix LTD.

3, Lancaster Court

Coronation Road High Wycombe

Bucks HP123TD, England

Tel: +44 1494 450666

Fax: +44 1494 450155

WWW: www.teklogix.co.uk

Email: [email protected]

Psion Teklogix AB

Stora Badhusgatan 18-20

411 21 Göthenburg, Sweden

Tel: +46 31 13 15 50

Fax: +46 31 13 57 80

Email: [email protected]

Psion Teklogix Finland

Metsänneidonkuja 8

02130 Espoo

Finland

Tel: +358 9 4307 8390

Fax: +358 9 4307 8395

Email: [email protected]

Psion Teklogix Danmark

Vesterballevej 4-6

7000 Fredericia

Danmark

Tel: +45 76 24 0133

Fax: +45 75 94 4679

Email: [email protected]

Psion Teklogix Inc. (Singapore)

583 Orchard Road

# 15-01 Forum

Singapore 238884

Tel: +65 735 8108

Fax: +65 733 5990

Email: [email protected]

Psion Teklogix de Mexico, S.A. de C.V.

Sierra Mojada 626, 2º Piso

Col. Lomas Barrilaco, C.P. 11010

Mexico, D.F., Mexico

Tel: ++52 55 5 327 1124

Fax: +52 5 327 1123

Email: [email protected]

Psion Teklogix Italia S.r.I

Via Galilei, 47

20092 Cinisello Balsamo

Milan, Italy

Tel: +39 2 6604 5410

Fax: +39 2 6604 5412

Email: [email protected]

Psion Teklogix do Brasil, Ltda.

Al. Casa Branca, 851 - conj. 101 e 102

São Paulo - SP - 01408-001

Brasil

Tel: +55 11 3064 0868

Fax: +55 11 3068 8198

WWW: www.teklogixbrasil.com.br

Email: [email protected]

Psion Teklogix Benelux

Nieuwe weg 1

2070 Zwijndrecht

Belgium

Tel: +32 (0)3 250 22 00

Fax: +32 (0)3 250 22 20

Email: [email protected]

Chile Psion Teklogix International Inc.

Avenida Vitacura 2909, Oficina 703

Las Condes

Santiago, Chile

Tel: +56 2 334 9344

Fax: +56 2 233 3868

Email: [email protected]

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual A-3

Psion Teklogix de Argentina, S.A.

Avenida Moreau de Justo 1180

Piso 1, Oficina C-105

Buenos Aires 1107

Argentina

Tel: +54 11 4343 0193

Fax: +54 11 4343 6310

Email: [email protected]

Psion Teklogix España, S.L.

Cityparc Ronda de Dalt

Ctra. Hospitalet 147-149

Edificio Atenas 2˚ 3ª

08940 Cornellà de Llobregat (Barcelona)

España

Tel: +34 9 3475 0220

Fax: +34 9 3475 0230

Email: [email protected]

Psion Teklogix Africa

Postnet Suite 39, Private Bag x11

Halfwayhouse, 1685 Ground Floor East

Waterfall Edge Phase 2, Waterfall Park

Bekker Road MIDRAND 1685

South Africa

Tel: 27-11-805-7440/1/2

Fax: 27-11-805-7444

Psion Teklogix Systems India Pvt. Ltd.

M-74, 1st Floor, “M” Block Market

Greater Kailash-Il

New Delhi - 110048

India

Tel: +91 11 621 9257

Fax: +91 11 621 9076

Email: [email protected]

Psion Teklogix B.V.

Venrayseweg 57,

5928 NZ Venlo

Nederlands

Tel: 0031-77-32400.44

Fax: 0031-77-32400.53

A.3 W

ORLD

W

IDE

W

EB

www.psionteklogix.com

A 4 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

A

PPENDIX

P

ORT

P

INOUTS

A

ND

C

ABLE

D

IAGRAMS

B.1 7535 Tether Port Pinout

The tether port connector incorporates multiplexed undecoded scanner, decoded scanner, RS232 serial, and USB interfaces. In order for it to operate, a special wiring scheme is needed. If you have a need to create cables for the tether port, contact Psion Teklogix and request document # 1010008 “Instruction Tether Port

Termination”. Attempting to interface to the tether connector without following this document may cause damage to the 7535 or the tethered device.

B.2 Docking Port & Battery Connector - TBD

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual B-1

Appendix B: Port Pinouts And Cable Diagrams

Docking Port & Battery Connector - TBD

B-2 Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

I

NDEX

# of Cols (ANSI) 164

# of Cols (TESS) 178

# of Pages (ANSI) 163

# of Rows (ANSI) 164

# of Rows (TESS) 178

A accents, adding (Custom Characters) 157 accessories bar code readers, connecting 207 hand strap 14 picker cradle (7535) 222 pistol grip 15

Addendum 94, 96, 98, 99 address, IP 19 addresses, network See also Network addresses 201

Ad Hoc network 21 advanced long range (SE1223ALR) scanner 233 advanced NETWLAN settings 22

AIAG

AIAG Strip 90

Mixed AIAG 187

AIAG Strip 90 aiming dot, duration of 88

All Fld Video 189

Alpha parameters 134, 138

ALR (advanced long range) scanner 233

ALT Key 39 anchor (viewport) 195

Anchor Column 196

Anchor Line 196

Anchor View x origin 175, 190 y origin 175, 190

ANSI

# of Cols 164

# of Pages 163

# of Rows 164

Applications menu 160

Boldface indicates a parameter name.

arrow keys 129 auto-answerback string 167

Auto Term# 162, 176

Group 162, 176 block mode 130, 168–170

Colour Override 166 configuration 128

Conn Type (connection type) 162

CR character 172 device attribute requests 129 device attribute string 167 disabling the keyboard/scanner 172

Edit Modes 173

ENTER key 129, 171

Function key equivalents 129

Group Auto Term# 162, 176

Host (Connection Type) 163

Kbd Modes 170–172 keyboard lock 168

LF character 172 local editing mode 130, 167

Media Copy 168 mnemonics 173 multiple sessions 160

Port 163 sessions, closing 131 sessions, establishing new 131 sessions, listing 131 sessions, moving between 131 settings 161–175

TCP Direct connection 162

Telnet connection 162

Terminal # 162 transmitting data 92, 95, 168

Xmit Modes 166–170

ANSI Settings

Connection Type - Telnet & TCP Direct

162

Screen settings 163

App. parameter 179 appearance (display colour scheme) 79

Append Enter 187

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual I

Index

Boldface indicates a parameter name.

Append F0 187 appending to bar codes characters 88, 92, 95

Applications

ANSI Settings 161–175 character attributes (TESS) 180

Character Sets (TESS) 180

Fields parameters (TESS) 188

Host Conn (ANSI) 162

Host Conn (TESS) 177 menu (Applications) 160

Scanner parameters (TESS) 186

Screen parameters (ANSI) 163

Screen parameters (TESS) 178

TESS Settings 176–191

Type and Title 161 approvals

7535 (including scanner) 230 arrow keys 129 completing a data field 122, 188 cycling through special characters 135, 147

Enh Mode, using 190 in macros 148 moving the cursor 39

Arrow mode 170

Arrows 199

ASCII decimal equivalents of characters 182

Full Ascii 90 matching fields 181

Async In 174 attributes, video 165, 189

Audio 150 audio indicators adjusting volume 49 description of beep conditions 49 volume adjustment using the BLUE key 49 authentication, network (Shared Mode) 28

Auto-Answer 167

Auto Radio Addr 143, 203

AutoRep Fn (function key sent to host) 182

AutoRep T/O 182 auto tab fields 121

Auto Term# (ANSI) 162, 176

Auto wrap 173

B backlight display 77 intensity 43 keyboard 42 backspace (CTRL H) 171 bar code

AIAG 187 appending to 88, 92, 95 connecting bar code reader 207 decodes required 87 decoding edge-to-edge 87 displaying type of bar code 88 external bar code reader 207 parameters 90–107 prefix character 92, 95

Security 87 stripping characters 92, 95 suffix character 92, 95 symbologies

Codabar 99

Code 11 100

Code 128 93

Code 39 90–91

Code 93 99

D 2 of 5 103

EAN 13 94

EAN 8 96

IATA 2 of 5 104

I 2 of 5 101

MSI/Plessy 102

UPC A 97

UPC E 98 bar-code-only fields 121 bar code reader external (specs) 231 external scanner, operation of 207 integrated scanner, operation of 50 internal or integrated (specs) 231 batteries a description of 207 capacity dialogue box 83 charging 13, 35 gauge 48 installing 34, 35 installing in 7535 17 power info 68 power saving scheme dialogue box 84 removing 34

II Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Boldface indicates a parameter name.

run time, maximizing 55 safety precautions 208 specifications 240 battery charger safety instructions 209–210 battery pack 207–209 battery safety 208–210 battery See also batteries 207

Baud 193

Beam Lockout 187 beep conditions 150 beeper adjusting volume 49 description of beep conditions 49 volume adjustment using the BLUE key 49 beeper sounds 150

Beep Tone and Beep Time 150 bell (CTRL G) 171

Binary print 183

BKSP (DEL Key) 39

BKSP/DEL Key

TESS sessions, BKSP key behaviour in

123

TESS sessions, DEL key behaviour in

124 blinking video attribute 165, 189

Block Cursor 154 block mode, ANSI 130, 168–170 bold video attribute 165, 189

Brightness 198

Buffer 194

C cable diagrams B-1 calibrating (touchscreen) 44, 85

Card Information Structure - CIS

(TRX7431) 144 changing softkey labels (Label F1-F5)

165 changing softkey labels (Label F1-F6)

179

Character parameters (TESS) 180 characters appending to bar codes 92, 95

Char Set, choosing (TESS) 180 cycling through 135, 147 decimal values of 182

EOB chars 170

EOL chars 169

Lower (ANSI) 174 prefix 92, 95 stripping 92, 95 suffix 92, 95

Upper (ANSI) 174 character set (Tether & Console Port) 192

Character Sets

Host Char Set 174 character sets choosing in TESS 180

Lower (ANSI) 174

Upper (ANSI) 174 charger descriptions of 35 safety instructions 209–210 charging (battery) 13

Char Set (TESS) 180 check digit 94, 99, 100, 101, 102, 103

Chk Digit, 1 100, 102

Chk Digit, 2 100

CIS Data (Card Information Structure)

144

Click Data (scanner double-click) 88

Click Time (scanner double-click) 87

CLR/DEL key

Local Echo mode (ANSI) 171

CLR Key 200

Codabar 99

Code 11 100

Code 128 93

Code 39 90–91

Code 93 99

Colour Override 166, 180

Column Offset 196 columns number of in ANSI screen 164 number of in TESS screen 178 configuring IEEE 802.11 radio 18 configuring softkey labels (Label F1-F5)

165 configuring softkey labels (Label F1-F6)

179 connection, host 162, 177

Conn Type (connection type) 162, 177

Cont Nxt Fld 187 contrast, adjusting 43 contrast, adjusting display 43 control codes 173

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Index

III

Index control panel accessing 73 advanced setup 86 basic setup 76

Display Properties 76

Boldface indicates a parameter name.

linefeed mode (ANSI) 171 moving between fields 170, 188 newline mode (ANSI) 171

Custom Characters 157 icons 74 keyboard properties 80 power management properties 83 stylus properties 85 country code 94

CR/LF

CTRL J 171

LF character 172

Newline 172 cradle See also Picker cradle 222

CRC (serial I/O) 185, 186

CTRL commands

CTRL a 131

CTRL c 126

CTRL f 122

CTRL G (Bell) 171

CTRL h 127

CTRL H (Backspace) 171

CTRL h (host select) 126

CTRL i 122

CTRL I (Tab) 171

CTRL J (Line Feed) 171

CTRL K (Vertical Tab) 171

CTRL L 127, 148

CTRL L (Form Feed) 171

CTRL p (reprint) 126

CTRL r 122

CTRL s 125

CTRL s (status, displaying continuously) 126

CTRL t 125

CTRL t (status, display with unit #) 126

CTRL u 122

CTRL w 125

CTRL w (status, display in Lock B & H mode) 126

CTRL Key 39 cursor changing shape of 154

Enh Edit mode 190 field advance (tab) 121 field backspace 121 field exit 121

Field Order 188 home 121

D data entering 121, 190

Ign Bcode_fld 190 with a bar code reader 207 serial I/O 185

Serial In/Out 185 transmitting from the terminal 172, 188 transmitting from the 7535 121, 167

Data Bits 193 dead zone 235 decimal values of keys 182 decoding bar codes decodes required 87

Security 87 decrementing parameters 134, 137

Default Colour 160

Default font 164, 189

DEFAULT key (F3) 114

DEFLT key (F3) 139

DEL (BKSP) Key 39

DEL/CLR key

BKSP key (ANSI) 171

Local Echo mode (ANSI) 171

Dev Attr 167 device attribute requests 129 device attribute string 167

DHCP (IP address) 19 dialogue box, using 68 digit check digit 94, 99, 100, 101, 102, 103 number system 98, 99

Disable kbd 172 disabling/enabling Y/N parameters 134,

138

Disp controls 173 display

Anchor Column 196

Anchor Line 196

Anchor View 175, 191 appearance (colour scheme) 79 backlight 77 backlight, adjusting 43

Brightness 198

IV Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Boldface indicates a parameter name.

contrast (control panel) 77 contrast, adjusting 43

Display Properties 76

Display Shift 154

Field Scroll 178

ICH/DCH controls 173

Line Scrolling 198 moving 154

Origin Scroll 178

Panning 198 positioning 178 split screens 155

Use Increment 154 video attributes 165, 189 viewport, mapping 195

Wraparound 198

X-Increment 154

Y-Increment 154 display contrast, adjusting 43 displaying TESS version number 125

Display Menu selecting a TESS session 120

Display menu 132

Display Properties 76

Display Shift 154 docking device icons 49 docking station uploading data using 57

Dot Time 88 double-click appending characters to a decoded bar code 88 scanner trigger 87

D 2 of 5 103

E

EAN/UCC 128 93

EAN 13 94

EAN 8 96

EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol)

29

Echo Mode 170

Edit extent 173 editing 167

Edit Modes 173 edit modes, TESS 122 empty entry fields 182 emulation keys field advance (tab) 121 field backspace 121 field exit 121 home 121 tab (field advance) 121 emulation keys, IBM 5250 121 enabling/disabling Y/N parameters 134,

138

End (ANSI) 174

Enh Edit Mode (TESS) 190

ENTER key 129 completing a data field 122

CR/LF character 172

Enter on Arrows 188

Local Echo mode (ANSI) 171 newline mode (ANSI) 171

Xmit Enter 172

Enter On Arr 188

Enter To F0 188

ENT Key 200 entry fields 120 empty fields 182

Function keys 190 hidden match 181

Ign Bcode_fld 190 video attributes 165, 189 visible match 181

Entry Mode 190 entry mode 190

EOB chars 170

EOL chars 169

Erasure Mode 173

Err Accept 91

Error Tone and Error Time 150

ESC Key 40

ESSID (Extended Service Set Identifier)

20

Exp to UPC A 98

Extended Service Set Identifier (ESSID)

20

Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP)

29

F

Fcursor mode 122 features (of 7535) 5

FETM 169 field advance 121 field advance key function 121 field backspace 121

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Index

V

Index field backspace key function 121 field exit key function 121

Field mode 122

Field Order 188 fields

Arrow mode 170 auto-tab fields 121 bar-code-only fields 121 completing a data field 122, 188

Enh Edit mode 190 entry fields 120, 182 field advance (tab) 121 field backspace 121 field exit 121

Field Order 188

Fields/Page 179

Field Scroll 178

Field Size 92 fixed fields 120 hidden match 181 home 121

Ign Bcode_fld 190

“insert” mode 172, 190 match fields 120 number of in screen 179

“replace” mode 172, 190 serial I/O fields 121

Serial In/Out 185 size 92 tab (field advance) 121

“transmit on” 121 video attributes 165, 189 visible match 181

Fields parameters (for TESS Settings) 188

Fill Chr 182 fixed fields 120

F Keys (function keys) 200

Flow Control 193

Follow Cursor 198 font

Default Font 164, 189

Font Chg 152

Font Override 159 fonts, changing 116

Foreground & Background (Colour

Override) 166, 180

Foreground & Background (Default

Colour) 160

Boldface indicates a parameter name.

Format Effector Transfer

Mode (FETM) 169 form feed (CTRL L) 171

Full Ascii 90

Function Keys 113 softkeys 114

36-key keyboard 114

58-key keyboard 113

Function keys 129

ANSI equivalents 129 auto reply mode 182 completing a data field 122 entering data 190 executing procedures from the local menu 127

Label F1-F5, changing 165

Label F1-F6, changing 179

Open Fky Only 190 serial I/O 186

G

GATM (Guarded Area Transfer

Global Macros adding special characters 147 displaying special characters (ASCII)

147

Group (ANSI Auto Term#) 162, 176

H

Mode) 169 hand strap, installing on 7535 14 helpdesk 4, A-1 hidden fields match 181 high performance (SE1200HP) scanner

232

H Match Chr 181 home key function 121 host multiple hosts 127 selecting a host 127 switching between hosts 183

Host (ANSI Connection Type) 163

Host (TESS Connection Type) 177

Host Char Set 174

Host Connection

ANSI 162

TESS 177

Host echo mode 170 host select (CTRL h) 126

VI Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

I

I/O fields 121

IATA 2 of 5 104

Boldface indicates a parameter name.

IBM 5250 Emulation Keys 121

ICD/DCH controls, displaying 173

IEEE radio, configuring 18

Ign Bcode_fld 190 imager (2D) scanner 53

Inc Country 94

Include Chk 90, 94, 96, 98, 99, 100,

102, 104

Include Chk (D 2 of 5 symbology) 103

Include Chk (I 2 of 5 symbology) 101

Include Sym (Code 128) 93

Inc Num Sys 98, 99 incrementing parameters 134, 137

Indicator 88

Indicators 148 indicators battery gauge 48 docking devices 49

LED functions 45 modifier keys 48 onscreen 47 radio signal quality 48 scanner message 53 security level 49 status area 119 task bar 64 tethered device 48

Infrastructure network 21

Initial RTT 143, 203 input bar-code-only fields 121 bar code reader 207

I/O fields 185

Input tmo 194

“insert” mode 172, 190

Open Fky Only 190

Output tmo 194

“replace” mode 172, 190 serial I/O 185 serial I/O fields 121

Serial In/Out 185

Input Tmo 194

Insert mode 122

“insert” mode 172, 190 installation hand strap 14 pistol grip 15 integrated scanner option 50

Intensity (7035 backlighting) 79, 81

IP address, assigning to radio 19

ITF Chk (D 2 of 5 symbology) 103, 104

ITF Chk (I 2 of 5 symbology) 101

I 2 of 5 101

Short Code 87

K

Kbd lock 168

Kbd Locked 184

Kbd Modes 170–172 keyboard compatibility with VT220 ANSI keyboard 129 disabling the keyboard 172 function keys 129

Kbd modes 170–172 key repeat 80, 81 lock 168, 184 lock messages 126 one shot mode 82

36-key keyboard 40

58-key 40

Keyboard (Tekterm) 145 keyboard backlight 42 keyboard keys 37

ALT 39 arrow keys 39

BKSP 39

CTRL 39

DEFAULT key (F3) 114

DEL 39

ESC 40 function keys, accessing 113

LITERAL key (F5) 114 macro keys 115, 145 modifiers 38 navigating using the keyboard 61

NEXT key (F1) 114 one shot mode 82

PREVIOUS key (F2) 114

SAVE key (F4) 114

SCAN 40

SHIFT 39 softkeys 114

SPACE 40

TAB 40

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Index

VII

Index

Boldface indicates a parameter name.

keyboard mapping (Scan-See) 200 keyboard modes 116

Keyboard Properties 80, 81 backlight 81 one shot mode 82 key function field advance (tab) 121 field backspace 121 field exit 121 home 121 tab (field advance) 121 keys alpha keys, 36-key keyboard 41 emulation keys, IBM 5250 121 transmit key 168 menu 127 procedures 127 process 127, 183

Save on Reset 183

“LOCK–B” message 126, 178 locked keyboard 168, 184 locked 7535 182

“LOCK–H” message 126, 178 lock time, decreasing with queuing mode 128 long range (SE1200LR) scanner 232

Lower (ANSI Host Char Set) 174

L

Label F1-F5 165

Label F1-F6 179 labels, changing softkey (Label F1-F5)

165 labels, changing softkey (Label F1-F6)

179 launching

DOS 132

Parameters menu 132

Tekterm 132

Lcl Process 127, 183

LED charge 46 functions (7535) 45 receive 46 scan 47 transmit 46

LED Scan-See

Brightness 198

LF/CR

CTRL J 171

LF character 172

Newline 172

Line Offset 196

Line Scrolling 198

LITERAL key (F5) 114

Lithium-Ion batteries installing 35 removing 34 local editing mode, ANSI 130, 167

Local echo mode 170

M

Macro keys accessing 115

ASCII characters, entering 147 programming 146 programming special keys 148 text, entering 147

Unicode values, entering 147

36-key keyboard 115

58-key keyboard 115

Macros keys

Macros menu, accessing 145 maintenance (7535) 58 mapping keyboard (Scan-See) 200 mapping viewport 195 match fields 120

MATM 169

Media Copy (ANSI) 168 memory, resetting 139 menu, local 127

Menu mode 118 launching 118 taskbar (switching between apps) 118 menus, working with 133 messages enabling/disabling next message 184

Indicator 88

“LOCK–B” 126, 178

“LOCK–H” 126, 178

“NEXT–B” 127, 128

“NEXT–H” 127, 128

“RESET: Press Enter” 120

Result 88 scanner warning message 88

TESS status message 125 milestone 184

VIII Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Boldface indicates a parameter name.

Mixed AIAG 187 mnemonics (ANSI) 173 mode serial I/O 185

Model 7000

Brightness 198 modes, keyboard 116 modifier keys 38 locking 39

One Shot Mode 82 unlocking 39

Mod 10 Chk 91, 104

Mod 10 Chk (D 2 of 5 symbology) 103

Mod 10 Chk (I 2 of 5 symbology) 101

Mod 43 Chk 91 moving the display 154, 178

MSI/Plessy 102 multiple

ANSI sessions 160 applications 160 hosts 127

TESS sessions 160

Multiple Area Transfer

Mode (MATM) 169

Terminal # (TESS) 120 number system digit 98, 99 numeric fields (Rjct if Alpha) 187 numeric parameters 134, 137 numeric parameters, minimum/maximum limits to 134, 137

O of rows (ANSI) 164 of rows (TESS) 178

Terminal # (ANSI) 128, 162

Off & On buttons 16, 36 offices list 4, A-3 off-line 7535 using local procedures 127 offset (viewport) 195

OFF Timeout 79

On & Off button 16, 36 one dimensional internal scanner 53

One Shot Mode 82

ON Threshold 78, 81

Open Fky Only 190 order of fields in TESS screen 188

Origin Scroll 178 output/input fields, serial port 185

Output Tmo 194

N

NETWLAN, advanced settings 22 network

Ad Hoc 21 connection, monitoring 57 control panel settings 201

DHCP 19

ESSID, assigning 20 infrastructure 21

IP address 19 networks to access, specifying 23 preferred 23 type to access 23

Network addresses 201 network authentication (Shared Mode) 28

Newline 172

“NEXT–B” message 127, 128

“NEXT–H” message 127, 128

NEXT key (F1) 114

Next X 184 number of columns (ANSI) 164 of columns (TESS) 178 of pages (ANSI) 163

P pages

# of Cols (TESS) 178

# of Columns (ANSI) 164

# of Pages (ANSI) 163

# of Rows (ANSI) 164

# of Rows (TESS) 178

Fields/Page (fields per page) 179 positioning 178 queuing mode 128 reprinting 126 size/shape 164

Pages Saved (TESS) 179

Panning 198 parameters

Alpha parameters 134, 138 numeric 134, 137 saving changes to 138 string entry 135, 138, 147

Y/N (boolean) 134, 138

Parity 193 password, supervisor 152

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Index

IX

Index

PDF internal scanner 53 period – ASCII decimal equivalent 182 peripherals, defining connections 191 picker cradle 222 installing cable 224 powered 10-55 VDC 222 powered 12 VDC 222 unpowered 222 pinouts B-1 pins – enabling for printing 183 pistol grip, installing on 7535 15 pitch, scanning 235 pivot (viewport) 195

Port (ANSI Connection Type) 163

Port (TESS Connection Type) 177

Port (802.IQ v2) 202 port pinouts B-1 ports

ANSI Connection Type 163

Baud 193

Buffer 194

Data Bits 193

Flow Control 193

Input tmo 194

Output tmo 194 parameters 192

Parity 193

Retries 194 serial 184, 185

Serial In/Out 185 settings 191 settings (tether & console port) 191 settings for Tether and console 192

Stop Bits 193

TESS Connection Type 177

Test 194

Tether and Console Port settings 191 port settings (tether & console) 191–194 position of screen 178

Power Management Properties 83 battery capacity 83 scheme, power saving 84

Power Mgmt 151

Power Scheme 84 power up 7535 16 preferred networks 23 prefix (serial I/O) 185, 186

Prefix Char 92, 95

Boldface indicates a parameter name.

PREVIOUS key (F2) 114

PREV key (F2) 134, 137 printing

Binary print parameter 183 pages 126

Printer parameter 183 procedures, local 183 process, local 127, 183 programming macro keys 146 protocol, 802.IQ v1 143

Protocol Type 144

PrtScr key 171 punctuation marks, accessing (SHIFT

Key) 39

Q queuing

R enabling/disabling next message 184 mode 128, 183 pages 128

Queuing parameter 127, 183 response time, improving 128 radio

Auto Radio Addr (narrow band radio)

203

CIS Data (Card Information Structure)

(TRX7431) 144 configuring 18

Ad Hoc 21

Advanced NETWLAN settings 22 authentication, network 28

EAP (Extensible Authentication

Protocol) 29

ESSID 20

Infrastructure 21

IP address 19

NETWLAN advanced settings 22 network authentication 28 network to access 23 preferred networks 23 saving settings 21

WEP (Wired-Equivalent Privacy)

Keys 24

Wireless Networks dialogue box 20

Initial RTT (WaveLAN 802.11 DS

SS) 143, 203

Protocol Type 144

X Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Radio Address (narrow band radio)

203

Radio Address (WaveLAN 802.11 DS

SS) 143 signal quality 48

Radio Addr

Auto Radio Addr (narrow band radio)

203

Radio Address 143, 203 narrow band radio 203

WaveLAN 802.11 DS SS 143

802.IQ v1 143 radio address, automatic (802.IQ v1) 143 radio specifications 230 recalibrating (touchscreen) 44, 85 receive LED 46

Repeat Delay (between key repeats) 81

Repeat Rate (of key repeats) 81

Replace mode 122

“replace” mode 190 reprinting a page 126

“RESET: Press Enter” message 120 resetting default parameter values 139

TESS session 126

7535 memory 139 resetting the 7535 30 response time, improving with queuing mode 128

Result (scan) 88

Result Time 88

Retries 194 reverse video attribute 165, 189

Rjct if Alpha 187 rows number of in ANSI screen 164 number of in TESS screen 178

S safety instructions battery charger 209–210 general xii scanner 50 safety warning, scanner 50

SATM 169

SAVE key (F4) 114

Save on Reset 183

SCAN Key 40 scanner

Boldface indicates a parameter name.

advanced long range (ALR) 233 aiming (target) dot duration 88

Append Enter 187

Append F0 187 appending data 88 bar code, appending data to 88

Click Data (appending data) 88

Click Time (double-click) 87

Cont Nxt Fld 187 disabling the scanner 172

Dot Time 88 double-click 87 high performance (HP) 232 long range (LR) 232 one dimensional (1D) internal scanner

53 parameters (for TESS Settings) 186

PDF internal scanner dimensional (1D)

53

Result Time 88 safety warnings 50

SE1200HP 232

SE1200LR 232

SE1223ALR 233

SE2223 2-D 233 specifications 231 target dot duration 88 techniques (scanning) 51

TESS Scanner parameters 186 troubleshooting tips 52 two dimensional (2-D) 233 two dimensional (2D) imager scanner

53 warning message 88

2-D (two dimensional) 233 scanning

AIAG 187 aiming (target) dot duration 88

Append Enter 187

Append F0 187 appending characters 88, 92, 95 check digit 94, 99, 100, 101, 102, 103

Click Data (appending data) 88

Click Time 87

Cont Nxt Fld 187 country code 94

Dot Time 88 double-click 87

Indicator 88 locked 7535 187

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Index

XI

Index

Boldface indicates a parameter name.

number system digit 98, 99 pitch 235 prefix character 92, 95 removing characters 92, 95

Result 88

Result Time 88

Rjct if Alpha 187 safety instructions 50

Scan-See 191

Security 87

Short Code 87 skew 235 specular dead zone 235 suffix character 92, 95 symbologies 89 target (aiming) dot duration 88

TESS Scanner parameters 186

Verify 87

Scan-See keyboard mapping 200 parameters, setting 195–200 port settings 191 serial number 199 viewport, mapping 195

Scan Tone and Scan Time 150 screen stylus, using to navigate 61 touch pen, using 61

Windows CE, navigating 61

Screen parameters

ANSI 163

TESS 178 screens

# of Cols (ANSI) 164

# of Cols (TESS) 178

# of Rows (ANSI) 164

# of Rows (TESS) 178

Anchor View 175, 191

Display Shift 154

Fields/Page 179

Field Scroll 178 moving between fields 170, 188

Origin Scroll 178 page size/shape 164, 178 positioning 178 splitting view of 155

Type and View IDs (Split screen) 155

Use Increment 154 x and y origin 175, 191

X-Increment 154

Y-Increment 154

Screen Switch 152 scrolling

Field Scroll 178

Origin Scroll 178

Security 87 security level icon 49 security settings 140 default mode 151

Font Chg 152

Screen Switch 152 supervisor password 152 user level options 152

Selected Area Transfer Mode (SATM) 169 select host (CTRL h) 126 selecting a host 127

Send Mile 184 serial I/O

TESS command 185 serial I/O fields 121

Serial In 185 serial number (Scan-See) 199

Serial Out 185

Serial Port 184 serial port enabling pins for printers 183

I/O fields 185

Serial In 185

Serial Out 185

Serial Port 184

SI CRC 185

SI Fkey 186

SI mode 185

SI prefix/suffix 185

SO CRC 186

SO prefix/suffix 186 service information 4, A-1

Set Mode (SM) control 173 setting the session number 120

SE1200HP 232

SE1200LR 232

SE1223ALR 233

SE2223 2-D 233

Shared Mode (network authentication) 28

SHIFT Key 39

Short Code 87

SI CRC 185

SI Fkey 186 signal quality,radio 48

XII Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Index

Boldface indicates a parameter name.

SI mode 185

SI prefix/suffix 185 size of fields 92

Size/Chars (bar code scanning) 91 skew, scanning 235

Sled See picker cradle. 222

Smart echo mode 170

SO CRC 186 softkey function keys 114 softkeys 149 softkeys (Function keys) 114 softkey labels, changing (Label F1-F5)

165 softkey labels, changing (Label F1-F6)

179

Softkeys (parameter) 149

SO prefix/suffix 186 sound 150

SPACE Key 40 special keys, programming into macros

148 specifications advanced long range (ALR) scanner

SE1223ALR 233 battery 240 for 7535 229 high performance (HP) scanner

SE1200HP 232 long range (LR) scanner SE1200LR

232 scanner 231

SE1200HP 232

SE1200LR 232

SE1223ALR 233

SE2223 2-D 233

2-D scanner SE2223 2-D 233 specular dead zone 235

Split Screen dividing and displaying 155 moving the cursor between split screens 156 parameters used 155 toggling between full and split screens 156

Type and View IDs 155 using a Wild Card (asterisk) 157

Split Screen 155

Standard (Code 128) 93

Start (ANSI) 174 start up menu 132 status, displaying continuously 126 status, displaying in Lock B & Lock H mode 126 status, displaying unit # 126 status area (Tekterm) 119 status message, TESS 125

Stop Bits 193 string entry parameters 135, 138, 147 adding special characters to 136 cycling through special characters 135 key function description 135, 138

Strip Leading 92, 95

Strip Trailing 92, 95 stylus (touch pen), using 61

Stylus Properties 85 sub-menus, accessing 133, 137 suffix serial I/O 186 suffix (serial I/O) 185

Suffix Char 92, 95 support services 4, A-1

Suspend State 85 symbologies

IATA 2 of 5 104 symbologies, bar code 89 displaying type of bar code 88

System Idle State 85

System Menu 65 control panel 66 cycle tasks 68 desktop 66 explorer 66 power info 68 security level 66 system tray 67 task manager 67

System parameters (Tekterm) 145

T tab (CTRL I) 171 tab (field advance) 121 tab, vertical (CTRL K) 171

TAB Key 40

Tab stop mode 173 target dot, duration of 88 taskbar onscreen indicators

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual XIII

Index battery gauge 48 docking devices 49 modifier keys 48 radio signal quality 48 security level 49 tethered device 48 using 64 task manager 67

TCP Direct connection 162, 177

Tekterm 113

Telnet connection 162, 177 terminal

Terminal # (ANSI) 162

Terminal # (ANSI) 162

Terminal # (TESS) 176

TESS 120

# of Cols 178

# of Rows 178

All Fld Video 189

Append Enter 187

Append F0 187

Applications menu 160

BKSP key behaviour 123

Blink (video attrib.) 189

Bold (video attrib.) 189

Colour Override 180 configuration 120

Conn Type (connection type) 177

Cont Nxt Fld 187

CTRL commands 122 cursor movement (in edit modes) 122

DEL key behaviour 124 displaying version number 125

Display menu, using 120 edit modes 122

Enh Edit Mode 190

Enter On Arr 188

Enter To F0 188, 190

Entry Mode 190

Fcursor mode 122

Field mode 122

Field Order 188

Field parameters 188

Host (Connection Type) 177

Ign Bcode_fld 190

Insert mode 122

Kbd Locked 184 keyboard lock 184 matching fields via data stream 181

Boldface indicates a parameter name.

milestone 184 modes (edit) 122 multiple sessions 160 number of columns in screen 178 number of rows in screen 178

Pages Saved 179

Port 177 query command 179

Replace mode 122 resetting a TESS session 126

Reverse (video attrib.) 189 running multiple sessions 120 selecting a session 120 settings 176–191 status message 125 switching between hosts 183

Terminal # 176

Tests 182 video attributes 189

802.IQ connection 177

9010t connection 177

TESS Settings character attributes 180 character sets, choosing 180

Connection Type - Telnet & TCP Direct

177

Fields parameters 188

Scanner parameters 186 screen settings 178

Test 194

Tether & Console Port character set 192 peripheral devices 191 scan-see parameters 195

Tether & Console Ports

Baud 193

Buffer 194

Data Bits 193

Flow Control 193

Input Tmo 194

Output Tmo 194

Parity 193

Retries 194

Stop Bits 193

Test 194 tethered device connecting and disconnecting 54 taskbar icons 48 threshold, setting (backlight) 78, 81 timeout (backlight) 79

XIV Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Boldface indicates a parameter name.

touch pen, using 61 touchscreen recalibration 44, 85 stylus, using 61 touch pen, using 61

Transfer Termination Mode (TTM) 169 transmit LED 46 transmitting data 167, 168, 172, 188

“transmit on” entry field 121 trigger, double-click 87 troubleshooting tips (scanning) 52

TTM 169 turning 7535 off 16 turning 7535 on 16 two dimensional (SE2223 2-D) scanner

233

Type 155 typing in upper case 182

U

UCC 128(Code 128) 93 underline

ASCII decimal equivalent 182 video attribute 165

Unicode values, entering 136, 147

UPC A 97

UPC E 98

Upper (ANSI Host Char Set) 174

Upper Case 182

Use Increment

X-Increment 154

Y-Increment 154

Use increment 154

User Idle State 84

View mode exiting 117 fonts, changing 116 font size, changing 116 launching 116 viewport, mapping 195 visible fields match 181

V Match Chr 181

VT220 Function keys – equivalent Psion

Teklogix keyboard Function keys 129

W warnings 88 warranty 4 website address A-4

WEP (Wired-Equivalent Privacy), configuring 24

Windows CE dialogue box 68 files, folders, & programs, working with 62

Windows CE, navigating in 61

Wireless Networks dialogue box, using 20 worldwide offices 4, A-3 wrap, auto 173

Wraparound 198

X

X-Increment 154

Xmit Count 167

Xmit Enter 172

Xmit key 168

Xmit Modes 166–170

Xmit Wait 167

XON/XOFF 200 x origin 175, 190, 191

V

Variations (Code 128) 93

Verify 87

Version 199

Version (Scan-See) 199 version number – TESS 125 vertical tab (CTRL K) 171 video attributes 165, 189

All Fld Video 189

Blink 165, 189

Bold 165, 189

Reverse 165, 189

Underline 165

View IDs 155

Y

Y/N parameters, enabling and disabling

134, 138

Y-Increment 154 y origin 175, 190, 191

1 Chk Digit 100, 102

1D internal scanner 53

132-col. font 164

2 Chk Digit 100

2-D (SE2223 2-D) scanner 233

Index

Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual XV

Index

Boldface indicates a parameter name.

2D imager scanner 53

36-key keyboard alpha keys, accessing 40, 41 uppercase letters, creating 41

5250 emulation keys 121

58-key keyboard 40

7 bit parameter 168

7535 approvals 230 display 230 off-line 127 specifications 229

7535 picker cradle See also Picker Cradle

222

80-col. font 164

802.IQ connection (TESS) 177

802.IQ v1(protocol)

Auto Radio Addr 143

802.IQ v2 202

802.11b radio, configuring 18

9010t connection (TESS) 177

XVI Teklogix 7535 Hand-Held Computer User Manual